• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Tantra
  • Tantra Collection
  • Action tantras
  • Toh 543

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh543.pdf

འཇམ་དཔལ་གྱི་རྩ་བའི་རྒྱུད།

The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī
Chapter 15

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa
འཕགས་པ་འཇམ་དཔལ་གྱི་རྩ་བའི་རྒྱུད།
’phags pa ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud
The Noble Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī
Ārya­mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa

Toh 543

Degé Kangyur, vol. 88 (rgyud ’bum, na), folios 88.a–334.a (in 1737 par phud printing), 105.a–351.a (in later printings)

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Kumārakalaśa
  • Śākya Lodrö

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2020

Current version v 1.21.34 (2025)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 1.29pm on Tuesday, 4th February 2025 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh543.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgements
i. Introduction
tr. The Translation
+ 37 chapters- 37 chapters
1. Chapter 1
2. Chapter 2
3. Chapter 3
4. Chapter 4
5. Chapter 5
6. Chapter 6
7. Chapter 7
8. Chapter 8
9. Chapter 9
10. Chapter 10
11. Chapter 11
12. Chapter 12
13. Chapter 13
14. Chapter 14
15. Chapter 15
16. Chapter 16
17. Chapter 17
24. Chapter 24
25. Chapter 25
26. Chapter 26
27. Chapter 27
28. Chapter 28
29. Chapter 29
30. Chapter 30
31. Chapter 31
32. Chapter 32
33. Chapter 33
34. Chapter 34
35. Chapter 35
36. Chapter 36
37. Chapter 37
38. Chapter 38
50. Chapter 50
51. Chapter 51
52. Chapter 52
53. Chapter 53
54. Chapter 54
c. Colophon
ap. Sanskrit Text
+ 37 chapters- 37 chapters
app. Introduction to the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa
ap1. Chapter A1
ap2. Chapter A2
ap3. Chapter A3
ap4. Chapter A4
ap5. Chapter A5
ap6. Chapter A6
ap7. Chapter A7
ap8. Chapter A8
ap9. Chapter A9
ap10. Chapter A10
ap11. Chapter A11
ap12. Chapter A12
ap13. Chapter A13
ap14. Chapter A14
ap15. Chapter A15
ap16. Chapter A16
ap17. Chapter A17
ap24. Chapter A24
ap25. Chapter A25
ap26. Chapter A26
ap27. Chapter A27
ap28. Chapter A28
ap29. Chapter A29
ap30. Chapter A30
ap31. Chapter A31
ap32. Chapter A32
ap33. Chapter A33
ap34. Chapter A34
ap35. Chapter A35
ap36. Chapter A36
ap37. Chapter A37
ap38. Chapter A38
ap50. Chapter A50
ap51. Chapter A51
ap52. Chapter A52
ap53. Chapter A53
ap54. Chapter A54
ab. Abbreviations
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· Abbreviations Used in the Introduction and Translation
· Abbreviations Used in the Appendix‍—Sources for the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa (MMK)
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· Source Texts (Sanskrit)
· Source Texts (Tibetan)
· Secondary Sources
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa is the largest and most important single text devoted to Mañjuśrī, the bodhisattva of wisdom. A revealed scripture, it is, by its own classification, both a Mahāyāna sūtra and a Mantrayāna kalpa (manual of rites). Because of its ritual content, it was later classified as a Kriyā tantra and assigned, based on the hierarchy of its deities, to the Tathāgata subdivision of this class. The Sanskrit text as we know it today was probably compiled throughout the eighth century ᴄᴇ and several centuries thereafter. What makes this text special is that, unlike most other Kriyā tantras, it not only describes the ritual procedures, but also explains them in terms of general Buddhist philosophy, Mahāyāna ethics, and the esoteric principles of the early Mantrayāna (later called Vajrayāna), with an emphasis on their soteriological aims.


ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

This translation was produced by the Dharmachakra Translation Committee under the supervision of Chökyi Nyima Rinpoche. Wiesiek Mical translated the text from the Sanskrit manuscripts, prepared the Sanskrit edition, and wrote the introduction. Paul Thomas, Ryan Damron, Anna Zilman, Bruno Galasek, and Adam Krug then compared the translation draft against the Tibetan text found in the Degé and other editions of the Tibetan Kangyur. Wiesiek Mical then completed the translation by incorporating all the significant variations from the Tibetan translation either into the English translation itself or the annotations.

The translation was completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


ac.­2

The generous sponsorship of 中國宗薩寺堪布彭措郎加, which helped make the work on this translation possible, is most gratefully acknowledged.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa (henceforth MMK) is a scripture devoted to Mañjuśrī, the bodhisattva of wisdom. It is a vaipulya sūtra‍—only a few large sūtras can claim this title‍—that was later classified as a tantra of the Kriyā class. Reflecting its status as a sūtra, the chapter colophons found in the MMK variously identify the work as a Mahāyāna sūtra, a bodhisattvapiṭaka (bodhisattva basket),1 and bodhisattvapaṭalavisara (full bodhisattva collection). The phrase “bodhisattva basket” is significant as it implies that the MMK is part of the Bodhisattva Basket, in contradistinction to the Śrāvaka Basket in the binary classification made by Asaṅga in the Abhidharmasamuccaya. While the Tibetan translations of the MMK refer to it as a “tantra,” the Sanskrit text refers to itself as a kalpa (“manual of rites”), a kalparāja (“king of rites”), and a mantratantra (“mantra treatise”). The term mantratantra, used throughout the MMK to refer to its own content and to tantric teachings in general, could also be understood as “mantra systems/methods,” or the “art of mantras.”


Text Body

The Translation
The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī

1.

Chapter 1

[F.88.a] [F.105.a]8


1.­1

Oṁ, homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas!


Thus did I hear at one time. Lord Śākyamuni dwelt above the Pure Abode, in an inconceivable, wondrous pavilion, circular in shape, with a congregation of bodhisattvas9 distributed all around, located in the canopy of the sky. There the Lord addressed the gods of the Pure Abode: {1.1}

1.­2

“Honored gods! Listen as I tell of the inconceivable, wondrous miracles of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, bodhisattva, and great being‍—listen as I tell of his conduct, different types of samādhi, and magical power; his liberation, maṇḍala, and his miraculous bodhisattva manifestations; and how he is the sustenance for all beings and brings them life, health, and sovereignty! I will explain, for the benefit of all beings, the mantra subjects that completely fulfill one’s wishes. Listen well and duly reflect upon it‍—I will now tell you about him.” {1.2}


2.

Chapter 2

2.­1

Now Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, gazing at this entire assembly, [F.109.a] [F.126.a] entered the samādhi called the gaze that causes all sentient beings to take up the samaya pledge. As soon as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered this samādhi, a ray of light issued from his navel. Along with many hundreds of thousands of millions of other rays, it entirely illuminated all the realms of sentient beings and, reflecting back onto the realm of the Pure Abode, suffused it with light. {2.1}


3.

Chapter 3

3.­1

Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, again looked at the realm of the Pure Abode and, bowing to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas gathered together in that great assembly, pronounced the most secret single-syllable mantra, which removes all poisons and can be employed in all rites the mantra that is effective in the practices of his maṇḍala and which can also be used in all minor ritual activities. What is that mantra? {3.1}

3.­2

“Homage to all the buddhas! This mantra is:


4.

Chapter 4

4.­1

Homage to the Buddha and all buddhas and bodhisattvas!528

Mañjuśrī then looked at the entire realm of the Pure Abode and again directed his gaze at the great assembly gathered there. Prostrating at the feet of Śākyamuni, he smiled and said this to the Blessed One: {4.1}

4.­2

“It is good fortune, O Blessed One, that there is a painting procedure, intended for the benefit of all beings, from the extensive chapters that produce a rain of desired results falling down from the Cloud of Dharma that arises from the accomplishment of sādhana methods of mantra practice. This procedure generates a vast amount of merit and creates the seed of perfect awakening; it also brings complete omniscience.529 {4.2}


5.

Chapter 5

5.­1

Now, Lord Śākyamuni, looking at the entire assembly, spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, yet another procedure from your ritual of cloth painting‍—the medium one. I will teach it now, so listen well and duly reflect upon it. {5.1}

5.­2

“First, to produce the medium painting, thread should be used as previously described, following the same procedure as before. The work should be done by craftsmen who have been trained beforehand, applying the same measurements as the previous cloth. Just as before, the cloth should be of excellent quality, white, tightly woven, and thoroughly clean604 and have fringe tassels.605 The painting should then be executed using uncontaminated paints free of hairs, dust, or other debris, with everything done just as before, except for the sizes and forms of the painted figures. {5.2}


6.

Chapter 6

6.­1

Now, Lord Śākyamuni again addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, yet another secret611 cloth-painting procedure,612 a third type, referred to as ‘smallest,’613 by the means of which all beings can effortlessly win accomplishment. {6.1}

6.­2

“Following the procedures as previously described, skilled craftsmen should prepare a cloth one width of the Buddha’s hand across that is in the same four-sided shape as before. The painting should then be done with the paints as previously described. {6.2}


7.

Chapter 7

7.­1

Now Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, circumambulated Lord Śākyamuni three times clockwise and, having prostrated at his feet, said this to the Blessed One:

“Good! It is good that you, the blessed one, the tathāgata, the worthy one, the perfectly awakened one, gave this Dharma discourse in such a clear way for the benefit, the welfare, and the happiness of all who observe their vidyā vows and in order to show your compassion for the world. You exemplified the bodhisattvas’ skill in means with this particular method that takes them higher than nirvāṇa623 [F.140.a] [F.157.a] and, with their continuous dedication to the goal of awakening,624 accomplishes their conduct consistent with all the goals of the mantras. This will promote the spread of this625 secret mantra among all people. {7.1}


8.

Chapter 8

8.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“The full topic of the cloth-painting procedure, Mañjuśrī, has now been taught by me for the benefit of those beings you foretold. They will succeed even with little skillful means.664 For their benefit I will now teach a sādhana method classified according to the type of activity, describing at length its different virtues. Listen to it well, [F.143.a] [F.160.a] and reflect upon it thoroughly. I will speak for the benefit of all beings.”665 {8.1}


9.

Chapter 9

9.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni addressed the hosts of gods who were sitting among the entire assembly:

“Esteemed friends! Please listen to my discourse about the method for accomplishing the conduct, maṇḍala, and mantra of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Hear this great vidyārāja‍—the supremely secret and sublime heart mantra that was taught by all the tathāgatas for the sake of protecting the practitioner‍—by the uttering of which all mantras are uttered. {9.1}


10.

Chapter 10

10.­1

At that time Lord Śākyamuni taught yet another supreme ritual practice:

“Having chosen another mantra from this king of manuals, one should go down to [the bank of] the great river Gaṅgā. Staying in a boat in the middle of the river, one should incant rice gruel mixed with milk three million times on the days of one’s choice. Subsequently, at the end of recitation, one will perceive all the nāgas. One should then start the main practice. For that, one should prepare, in the middle of the boat, a fire pit in the shape of a lotus. One should prepare a big offering of ironwood blossoms to the painting. The painting of the superior type should be positioned facing west, with oneself sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass facing east. One should incant each of the ironwood blossoms seven times and offer it into the blazing fire of cutch tree sticks. One should do this until one has offered thirty thousand such blossoms, each smeared with white sandalwood and saffron paste. One should use nothing else. One should wait for the nāgas to appear.717 They will be enticed by the power substances, but will not take them. {10.1}


11.

Chapter 11

11.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your ritual, a painting procedure of the medium type, a practice procedure serving as the means for accomplishing middling rites. I will teach it in brief, so please listen carefully and reflect upon it well. I will teach it now.” {11.1}

11.­2

Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, for his part, said this to the Blessed One:

“May the Blessed One, the teacher, full of compassion for the world and delighting in benefiting all beings, speak! Please speak, if you think that the time is right, out of compassion for us and regard for future generations.” {11.2}


12.

Chapter 12

12.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni again looked at the entire Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to [the instructions] for the followers of your vidyā mantra who strive to benefit all beings‍—what mantras956 they should be made to recite, by whom these mantras are to be recited, and the attendant rosary rites that are methods for accomplishing all the common mantras of all tantras. Listen carefully and reflect on this well. I will teach this [now].” {12.1}


13.

Chapter 13

13.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni again looked at the realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, O Mañjuśrī, a ritual sequence for a special worship of [the god of] fire, which is meant for those practitioners of vidyā who engage in the rite of homa according to the special procedure that has been succinctly explained in the chapter on mantras in your manual. Once established in this routine, beings become actively engage in the conduct of all vidyās. What is this sequence? The mantric words of the secret vidyā spell are as follows: {13.1} [F.169.b] [F.186.b]


14.

Chapter 14

14.­1

Then Lord Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, O Mañjuśrī, a secret vidyā mantra of yours that accomplishes all mantras. It was granted by the tathāgatas, arose from the treasury of their teachings, belongs to the ‘Cloud of Dharma,’ and is of the essence of the sky. This vidyā is the supreme lord of all mundane and supramundane mantras, just like the divine youth is the lord of all beings. This lord is described as a tathāgata, the supreme and the most excellent. Just as Lord Buddha, O divine youth, is the most eminent person among gods and men, so he‍—this supreme vidyārāja‍—is among all the mantras. He has been formerly taught by the blessed buddhas who are equal in number to the grains of sand in the river Gaṅgā and whose merits are ineffable. He has been regarded by them as the supremely secret heart mantra [F.172.b] [F.189.b] of the tathāgata Ratnaketu, auspicious in every respect. He is praised and extolled by all the buddhas, is the relief of all beings, and is the destroyer of every evil. He grants every wish and fulfills every hope. So what is this mantra?”1021 {14.1}


15.

Chapter 15

15.­1

At that time, the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi, the great being, was present in the midst of the same gathering. Seated, he rose from his seat, circumambulated the Blessed One clockwise three times, and, prostrating at the Blessed One’s feet, said this to him: {15.1}

15.­2

“Good, O Blessed One! For the sake of those who follow the conduct entailing the ritual divisions of vidyā and homa rites performed at the junctions of the day, you have clearly explained and elucidated with supreme eloquence the path that consists of rites involving vidyā mantras; the path that manifested from the great Cloud of Dharma; the path that comprises the detailed ritual instructions pertaining to the cakravartin, the great vidyārāja who is the heart essence of all the tathāgatas; the path that brings results and fulfills all aims completely; the unsurpassable path that leads to awakening; the path marked with the cause that generates the conditions, actions, and their certain results; the path that is the root of virtue that causes the attainment of the ten miraculous powers, and whose ultimate goal is to ascend to the seat of awakening. That, Blessed One, is excellent! May the teacher please instruct us on the signs that accord with the accomplishment of mantra that appear in dreams, signs indicating the time1123 when the beings who engage in the practice of all vidyā mantras should commence the activities that cause accomplishment, so that all vidyā mantras‍—the causes that fulfill the rites‍—bear results.” {15.2}

15.­3

Thus addressed, Lord Śākyamuni said this to the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi:

“Good, O lord of yakṣas! You act1124 for the benefit and happiness of many people. You act out of compassion for the world, in the interest of great numbers of people, for their benefit and happiness. You act in the interest of all the practitioners of vidyā mantras. [F.180.b] [F.197.b] Listen well then, and carefully reflect upon what I will now tell you. {15.3}

15.­4

“First, commencing the preparatory procedure as before, which is the same for all types of activity, one should go to a secluded place such as a mountaintop, a riverbank, a cave, or near a crossroad1125 and build a hut at a clean spot. Following the same procedure as before for all types of activity, one should install the painting and worship it with sumptuous offerings. Then, during the bright fortnight or the prātihāra fortnight, always on an auspicious day, during the first watch of the night, one should prepare a mixture of white sandalwood, camphor, and saffron, and light a fire using sticks of the cutch tree. Sitting in front of the painting at a distance of four cubits,1126 one should throw the oblation into the smokeless and flameless embers one thousand and eight times. Then, at the end of this offering, one should offer into the fire one thousand and eight lotus blossoms smeared with white sandalwood.1127 At the end of the homa, one should form the mudrā of the auspicious seat and offer a seat to one’s mantra deity, using the same mantra.1128 One should, however, perform the homa reciting the following mantra. {15.4}

15.­5

“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is as follows:

“Oṁ, you with the form of a divine youth! Show it, show! Reveal the truth to me in my dreams for the sake of my good fortune! Hūṁ hūṁ! Phaṭ phaṭ! Svāhā!1129 {15.5}

15.­6

“After performing the protection rite using this mantra, one should complete the required number of oblations in the homa rite as just described. Then, having spread around blades of kuśa grass that are pointed at both ends, one should go to sleep in front of the painting, not too far from it and not too near, with one’s head pointing east, using for a pillow a bundle of kuśa grass. During the first watch, while keeping oneself awake, one should salute all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, confess one’s wrongdoings, and offer oneself to all the buddhas. Then,1130 one should surrender to the power of sleep as one likes. {15.6}

15.­7
“Dreams that occur during the first watch
Are known to be generated by the humor of phlegm.
Those of the second watch, as they arise from bile,
Should be discounted as being of worldly origin. {15.7}
15.­8
“One should know the dreams of the third watch to be generated by the humor of wind,
And those of the fourth, to originate from truth.
As for the phlegm-influenced dreams at the beginning of sleep,
One should always watch out for the following: {15.8}
15.­9
“One may behold numerous jewel mountains,1131
Strings of pearls everywhere,1132 [F.181.a] [F.198.a]
Or oneself bathed
In a mass of water, {15.9}
15.­10
“Fully immersed in streams,
Or floating in a great ocean.
Wherever one perceives
One’s body to be,1133 {15.10}
15.­11
“One may see that place as dotted
With lotus ponds all around,
Floating gardens,
And tavern houses1134 {15.11}
15.­12
“Riding upon the waves
That surround them on all sides.
One may also see the Himalayas
Made of crystal and abounding in great rivers, {15.12}
15.­13
“Trees, and the king of mountains
Fashioned from piled-up crystal
And shaded by a latticework of pearls
With masses of pearls. {15.13}
15.­14
“Subjected to the influence of phlegm,
One may see a great rain with masses of water,
Or a bright white parasol
With white adornments, {15.14}
15.­15
“Or perhaps a white elephant.1135
Such dreams are said to be influenced by phlegm.
One may see a white yak-tail whisk,
Or a man dressed in white. {15.15}
15.­16
“If one touches sea salt, and so forth,
Or salt in general,1136
Or a strip of cotton or linen,
Or perhaps iron, silver, or aloewood, {15.16}
15.­17
“Touching or ingesting them
Indicates that the dream is of the phlegm type.
If one eats roasted beans,
Sesame paste, sweet rice pudding, {15.17}
15.­18
“Or different types of beans,
This, again, indicates that the dream is of the phlegm type.
Some say that eating svastikā cakes,
Or other food, such as rice-and-grain pudding with milk, {15.18}
15.­19
“Brings on dreams
Of the phlegm type.
The same goes for śaṅkulya or parpaṭa cakes,
Or different types of soup. {15.19}
15.­20
“Touching or eating them will cause
An increase of phlegm in one’s dreams.
It is agreed that there are many such types
Of hard and soft foods, in many forms.1137 {15.20}
15.­21
“If one eats or touches them,
The dreams will be induced by phlegm.
If one dreams of a seat, a bed, or a carriage for traveling
That is fashioned from a living being‍— {15.21}
15.­22
“If one touches, mounts, or sees such
During the first watch of the night
As objects in one’s dream,
All such dreams are said to be influenced by phlegm. {15.22}
15.­23
“Dreams of these types emerge from
And are effected by water,
And may be an indication of [having eaten]
Any of the various hard or soft foods that produce phlegm.1138 {15.23}
15.­24
“Seeing these objects in one’s dreams
Is due to the action of phlegm-producing foods. [F.181.b] [F.198.b]
The guides of the world have described
Many dreams that are hard even to conceive of.1139 {15.24}
15.­25
“For living beings, it is in the second watch
That dreams related to bile occur.
A person may see in a dream a blazing fire,
A light emanating from various jewels,1140 {15.25}
15.­26
“A conflagration, or meteors
Flashing in all directions.1141
Seeing these in a dream indicates that
One is debilitated1142 by bile. {15.26}
15.­27
“Likewise, should one see in one’s dream a ruby,
Or something else consisting of jewels,1143
One should know that these objects appear
To someone affected by bile. {15.27}
15.­28
“Corresponding to the experience of the element fire,
If one touches or ingests1144
Different yellow articles in one’s dreams,
One is debilitated by bile. {15.28}
15.­29
“One whose body is debilitated by bile
May see in one’s dream
A sun that burns uninterruptedly,
Continually spreading its intense heat. {15.29}
15.­30
“One may also perceive, in one’s dream,
The sky as being of golden color
And the ground as yellow.
This is due to the debilitating influence of bile. {15.30}
15.­31
“If one dreams, during the same watch,
Of a fire blazing all around
And illuminating the firmament of the sky,
One is flooded with the humor bile. {15.31}
15.­32
“One may see the ground colored golden,
Or the mountains, piles of rocks,
A great elephant for riding,1145
Or everything made entirely of gold. {15.32}
15.­33
“If one sees these persistently while asleep,
One is debilitated by the movement of bile.
If one dreams of a vessel made entirely of gold;
Or a golden carriage with similar adornments; {15.33}
15.­34
“Or a seat, or perhaps a bed
Made entirely of gold‍—
If one touches or mounts them in one’s dream,
This indicates that the dream is of the bile type. {15.34}
15.­35
“One may see oneself in a dream as wearing
Yellow garlands and clothes,
Covered in yellow unguents,
And provided with a yellow sacred cord; {15.35}
15.­36
“One may also see in one’s dream
One’s own body as yellow.
This is due to the debilitating influence of bile,
Which manifests itself during the second watch. {15.36}
15.­37
“These are the different categories
That dreams are grouped into based on color.1146
Thus, the dreams of the various appearances of yellow
Are caused by the humor bile. {15.37}
15.­38
“The body’s being affected by bile
Manifests during the second watch.
A great variety of forms
Arising out of yellow light {15.38}
15.­39
“Have been taught by the most eminent of men [F.182.a] [F.199.a]
To originate from bile.
As for the dreams that are of the wind type,
They are said to occur during the third watch of the night. {15.39}
15.­40
“If one sees all the directions
Completely filled with light,
And perceives oneself as moving through space,
Traversing the firmament of the sky, {15.40}
15.­41
“And continually wandering everywhere
Through space as far as the expanse of the sky,
Such a dream is said to be of the wind type,
As it brings this type of experience. {15.41}
15.­42
“Swimming,1147 jumping,
Climbing trees,
Reciting all treatises,
The mantras in particular, {15.42}
15.­43
“And also teaching or speaking,
Are generally caused by wind.
Also, climbing thorny trees,
Or eating food that is very bitter, {15.43}
15.­44
“Pungent, or sour‍—any such type of food‍—
Is caused by wind.
Tree fruits that are scattered by the wind
Produce masses of the humor of wind1148‍— {15.44}
15.­45
“If they are eaten in a dream,
Such a dream is said to be generated by wind.
The element wind present in
Liquid and solid foods and substances1149 {15.45}
15.­46
“Agitates the minds of beings
When they touch or eat them.
If one sees oneself
As being a servant to all beings, {15.46}
15.­47
“If this vision comes in a dream,
Such a person should be known to be of the wind type.1150
Different types of movements,
Different types of embracing and speaking, {15.47}
15.­48
“Or different harsh expressions1151
Indicate that the dream is the wind type.
These and other types of dreams
Have been taught by the most eminent of men. {15.48}
15.­49
“Three types of associations have been taught
Related to those who are of the attached, hateful, or deluded types:
Those with a proclivity to attachment generate phlegm,
Bile is the product of hatred, {15.49}
15.­50
“While wind originates from delusion.
A mixture of the three generates a mixture of humors.
When attachment is stirred in sleep,
It will manifest as sexual dreams.1152 {15.50}
15.­51
“Thus, the desire for women will manifest
In dreams generated by phlegm.
Quarreling based on hatred
Will occur in dreams generated by bile. {15.51}
15.­52
“Torpidity born from delusion
Manifests in dreams as the loss of memory.
In reality, though, dreams always manifest
Based on a mixture of the humors.1153 {15.52}
15.­53
“Thus, that which is designated as a dream
Is devoid, in all its [three] types, of pure essence.1154
Those who teach the truth taught the activities and lifespans
Particular to each of the [humor-based] category of beings.1155 {15.53} [F.182.b] [F.199.b]
15.­54
“Thus, beings described as being of the phlegm type
Have a nice complexion and are soft-spoken.
They live long lives, are intelligent,1156
Have oily skin, and are self-confident. {15.54}
15.­55
“They are fair skinned, tall,
And always fond of intercourse with women.
They are virtuous, heroic at any time,
And always delight in showing respect.1157 {15.55}
15.­56
“When this is indicated by their birth horoscope,1158
They could be jealous and lack distinction.1159
Some may become kings
Fit to take command of an army. {15.56}
15.­57
“Living according to their prescribed activity,
They will attain prosperity.
Their activities and their fruits are described as follows:
They do not neglect the activity [in favor of] the mantra,
As the mantra, according to what the guides of the world have said,
Is not the most important thing in terms of activity.1160 {15.57}
15.­58
“It is therefore said that in this world
Success belongs to those of the phlegm type.
They will attain dominion over the land,
Great prosperity, and magical powers.1161 {15.58}
15.­59
“A mantra reciter should not take
Any of the phlegm-producing foods in excess.
If one overindulges in these foods,
One’s dreams will become bereft of meaning. {15.59}
15.­60
“A mantra practitioner should therefore not indulge in these foods,
As they are said not to be conducive to accomplishment.
A wise and clever person
Should not sleep at that time. {15.60}
15.­61
“Now the characteristics of a person
Of the bile type will be described.
“He may be prone to hatred and anger,
Of black complexion, and physically weak.
He may be cruel and engage in cruel activities
And continually display a tendency toward deceit. {15.61}
15.­62
“He may also be continually valiant and daring
And be endowed with strength and intelligence.
He is talkative, has many friends,
And has a deep understanding of many treatises. {15.62}
15.­63
“Virtuous and firm in his actions,
He is also described as prone to hatred.
He is intelligent and possessed of great power,
But shows the signs of hatred. {15.63}
15.­64
“He resents the valorous, is wealthy,1162
Understands human nature,
And is of pleasant appearance, free, detached,
Stable, and always tolerant of suffering. {15.64}
15.­65
“Proud, greedy, and angry,
He is always fond of women.
Full of great energy and firm in applying the mantras,1163
He becomes very prosperous. {15.65}
15.­66
“He engages beings by assaulting them,
As they submit to the way he acts.1164
His mantras‍—those that arrest the life force of beings‍—
Are always successful. {15.66}
15.­67
“He swiftly accomplishes his violent aims
That have been rejected1165 by the Sage.
The activities of such an individual‍—
Those that harm living beings‍—will succeed. {15.67} [F.183.a] [F.200.a]
15.­68
“Rites of any mantra practitioner
That involve ritual methods
Will be successful when executed carefully,
Which is not the case for other individuals and rites.1166 {15.68}
15.­69
“So, too, the hateful mantras
That oppress other beings
Can, by the same token, interrupt the mantras of others
And succeed against angry beings. {15.69}
15.­70
“Wrathful mantras will be successful
In seizing the property of others
Or arresting their life force;
Such activities should not be combined with other mantras. {15.70}
15.­71
“A being predisposed to hatred
Can attain dominion over others;
He may be of a black, dark,1167
White, or mixed complexion. {15.71}
15.­72
“An ordinary human predisposed to anger
Cannot possibly have a golden complexion;
Such a person will have a rough and smoke-colored
Or tawny complexion. {15.72}
15.­73
“One born in the sign of Scorpio
Is heroic, cruel, and lustful,1168
Being in the house of the planet Mars.
One who is under the influence of Jupiter is predisposed to phlegm. {15.73}
15.­74
“Such a person will eat little
And be fond of pungent and sour tastes.
His life will be long
And his memory good. {15.74}
15.­75
“Now I will describe the activities and mannerisms
Of a person by nature predisposed to wind.
He has an unhealthy or rough complexion
But, in general, is not too weak. {15.75}
15.­76
“He is of feeble intellect and little knowledge,
Unstable, and ungrounded.
With a trembling body, tottering,
He vomits a lot and frequently defecates and urinates. {15.76}
15.­77
“He eats a lot and all the time,
And he talks a lot.1169
Being hostile to everyone,
He has many enemies. {15.77}
15.­78
“He is undisciplined and unhappy
In his life on earth.
Mantras for becoming invisible
Are said to succeed if used by him. {15.78}
15.­79
“He delights in foods
That stir up the humor of wind.
A mantra reciter should, however, never eat them,
If he wants his activity to be successful. {15.79}
15.­80
“Beings agitated due to the humor of wind
Are predisposed to the arising of ignorance.1170
They are described as belonging to the delusion type,
And become accomplished in stupefying mantras.1171 {15.80}
15.­81
“For those who are of the deluded type,
It is always desired to be accomplished in causing stupefaction.
One should ascertain the asterisms of the water signs
To know the true significance of planetary influences.1172 {15.81}
15.­82
“One should not perform peaceful1173 activities
If one is of the wind type and confused.1174
Likewise, one should not perform the enthralling, [F.183.b] [F.200.b]
Attracting, stupefying, or destroying of beings. {15.82}
15.­83
“Regarding the arising of delusion-generated evil
In beings dominated by the humor of wind,
The following signs have been taught
That indicate the truth in dreams. {15.83}
15.­84
“They have been previously described by sages
As serving the interests of beings.
Aries, Taurus, Gemini,
Cancer, Leo, {15.84}
15.­85
“Libra, Virgo, Scorpio,
Sagittarius, Capricorn,
Aquarius, Pisces, the elephants,
The celestials, the monkeys, the asuras, {15.85}
15.­86
“The siddhas, the gandharvas, the yakṣas, and so forth‍—
All those renowned to humanity‍—
The zodiac signs have been taught
By the supreme ones to the masses. {15.86}
15.­87
“Different activities have been described,
Of many types and various purposes.
In all these activities and the accumulated karma,
A wide range of qualities comes to fruition. {15.87}
15.­88
“It has been taught that for ordinary beings
No activity is devoid of such qualities.
Thus, one who engages in activities takes rebirth
Based on the qualities [of his karma].1175 {15.88}
15.­89
“When these qualities are infused with religious merit,
The practice of mantras will be successful.
The reciter who understands the true nature of such qualities
Understands the merits and defects of his karmic bonds.1176 {15.89}
15.­90
“If the authentic ritual procedure is not performed,
The activity will not take place, even if the qualities are present.
This is because the ritual produces the activity;
Such ritual is not without its qualities.1177 {15.90}
15.­91
“One who possesses the karmic qualities
For performing rituals will succeed.1178
Such ritual activities, along with their procedures,
Have been formerly taught by those with the ten powers. {15.91}
15.­92
“The karmic qualities for [performing specific] rites
Are indicated by the beings’ behavioral tendencies.1179
The different forms they see in dreams are regarded, similarly,
As the products of their karmic activities. {15.92}
15.­93
“Thus, based on the signs received in dreams,
One can determine the full range of activities to engage in.
Signs of different forms,
Some pleasing and nice to look at, {15.93}
15.­94
“Others ugly, or with forms of obstacles,1180
Will appear in dreams.
People who desire accomplishments
Should be very enthusiastic and diligent. {15.94}
15.­95
“The accomplishments will come to them
In terms of being of the highest, medium, or lowest range.
Activities that are violent and cruel1181
Always bring on dreams immediately [indicative] of the ripening fruits. {15.95}
15.­96
“Regarding the highest, steadfast activities,
They will be accomplished after a long time.
Worldly activities of those who are predominantly worldly
Will produce [corresponding karmic] qualities.1182 {15.96}
15.­97
“There are many dreams that occur to mantra reciters
That indicate their accomplishment of the mantra. [F.184.a] [F.201.a]
Lethargic sleep portends that
The mantra will not be accomplished. {15.97}
15.­98
“In that situation it is recommended to recite
The mantra that destroys the obstacles.
One should employ at that time
A mantra that is appropriate for reciters. {15.98}
15.­99
“The prescribed [mantra] is the six-armed
And six-faced [Mañjuśrī] Mahākrodha.
His four-syllable great mantra
Resides within his youthful form. {15.99}
15.­100
“He is of a terrible aspect and very frightening,1183
Manifesting in a form of a boar
In order to destroy the obstacles;
Black as night,1184 he is the king of gods. {15.100}
15.­101
“He is dressed in a tiger skin
And adorned with snakes with expanded hoods.
This great being holds a sword in his hand
And appears in the form of Death of great splendor. {15.101}
15.­102
“He is tough on all obstacle makers
And ends the life of vināyakas.
Hear, all the beings, his mantra,
The fiercest in the tantras.1185 {15.102}
15.­103
“This mantra removes all obstacles
From any given being.1186
It accomplishes all mantras.
Assembled gods, hear me! {15.103}
15.­104

“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is:

“He he, Mahā­krodha! The six-faced, six-legged destroyer of all obstacles, hūṁ hūṁ! Why do you tarry? O destroyer of the life of vināyakas, destroy my bad dreams! Lunge forward, lunge! Remember your pledge! Phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā!”1187 {15.104}

15.­105

As soon as this king, the Lord of Wrath,1188 was pronounced, all the vināyakas and obstructers became disturbed and frightened. With fainting hearts and panicked minds, they paid homage to Lord Śākyamuni and Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, and remained samaya-bound to them. {15.105}

15.­106

Lord Śākyamuni then looked at the entire realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to the great assembly of his followers:

“Ho ho, assembly of gods! He is the Lord of Wrath. While any of the worldly or transcendent mantras are being accomplished, the Lord of Wrath will tame any evil being that causes harm to the reciter, along with the culprit’s family. He will cause them to wither but will not take their lives.1189 [F.184.b] [F.201.b] Having burnt them and dried them up, he will assign a role to them, appointing them to protect, support, and guard the reciter. The being thus appointed will have to sustain the reciter. Any such being who would transgress this obligation and harm the practitioner who is under the protection of the Lord of Wrath {15.106}

15.­107
“Will have his head split into seven pieces by the Lord of Wrath,
Like a garland of arjaka tree blossoms.”1190
Having spoken thus, the foremost one among sages
Said this to Mañjughoṣa: {15.107}
15.­108
“Divine youth! Your mantras fulfill
All aims, the whole range of aims,
Especially for practitioners who
Pursue the aims of the mantra system. {15.108}
15.­109
“This mantra has been taught by the Lord of Wrath in the tantras
As the one that destroys all obstacles.
It has been formerly employed
For this purpose by the lords of the world, the buddhas, {15.109}
15.­110
“Namely for destroying evil obstacle makers
And appeasing the anger of enemies.
For the reciters it is necessary
To always recite it at nighttime.1191 {15.110}
15.­111
“It affords protection to sentient beings
And destroys bad dreams.
It has been taught by the supreme among people, the buddhas,
As being able to accomplish the aims of all mantras. {15.111}
15.­112
“I will further teach
The auspicious characteristics of men
For whom the mantras are successful‍—
Those of the highest, medium, and the lowest types. {15.112}
15.­113
“One who is energetic and intelligent;
Has a golden complexion, a large belly,
Elongated eyes, and smooth skin;
Is dispassionate and free of anger; {15.113}
15.­114
“Has red eye-corners and speaks nicely,
For him accomplishment is of the highest type.
One with delicate skin, a dark complexion,
And slim limbs that are not too long; {15.114}
15.­115
“Who is full of enthusiasm and energy,
Content, virtuous in every respect,
And pure on the account of his high birth;
Who has few desires, and is of weak constitution,1192 {15.115}
15.­116
“His accomplishment is certain‍—
It will be of the highest kind in all activities.
One whose body is not in any way inferior;
Who is dark as panic grass, full of vigor, {15.116}
15.­117
“Untroubled in mind, intelligent,
Always celibate and pure,
And always fond of fine1193 clothes;
Who knows the ways of the world, is disciplined, {15.117}
15.­118
“Has many friends, is always detached, [F.185.a] [F.202.a]
And eats moderately;1194
And who is pure, skilled, and moral,
Always enjoys pure conduct, {15.118}
15.­119
“Speaks the truth, and is compassionate
Will reach the highest type of accomplishment.
One not missing any limbs, full of qualities,
Born to a good family, always adhering to the Dharma, {15.119}
15.­120
“Devoted to his mother and father,
Reverential toward brahmins and guests,1195
Very compassionate, and steadfast
Will reach the highest type of accomplishment. {15.120}
15.­121
“One of pure, dark complexion and smooth skin,
Who speaks little and always remains pure,
Wants only the food and drink that are pure,
Has sex only with pure partners,1196 {15.121}
15.­122
“Knows the ways of the world, and is highly respected
Will reach the highest type of accomplishment.
One who is neither too short nor too tall,
Has hair1197 as black as antimony powder, {15.122}
15.­123
“Has loving eyes, is pure,
Always enjoys bathing,
And is propitiatory toward the Three Jewels
Will reach the highest type of accomplishment. {15.123}
15.­124
“One who engages in noble activities,
Who is a refuge to sentient beings and knows their minds,
And who is forbearing, polite in speech,
And reverent toward bodhisattvas‍—
He will reach a supramundane accomplishment
That is rich in results.1198 {15.124}
15.­125
“One who is very honest, heroic,
And full of vigor; who has undertaken solemn vows;
Who is endowed with good fortune, knows the mantras,
And understands the essence of all the tantras;1199 {15.125}
15.­126
“Who belongs to the kṣatriya caste
Or is an exemplary brahmin; who is intelligent,
Cavorts with women, is always passionate,
Has a golden complexion, {15.126}
15.­127
“Appears tall and fair skinned,
And has a long nose, big arms,
And dangling forearms; who is valiant,
Aspires to rule a great kingdom, {15.127}
15.­128
“Is reverent toward bodhisattvas,
Has a woman’s name,1200 worships goddesses,1201
And is devoted to the Three Jewels,
Adorned with bodhicitta,
Very compassionate, steadfast,
And has a certain amount of anger and ignorance; {15.128}
15.­129
“And who is endowed with good fortune, profoundly detached,
Of great vigor, difficult to subdue,1202
Beloved by women, and valiant
Will also win accomplishment of the highest type. {15.129}
15.­130
“One who is valiant, delights in drinking,
Always is in the company of women,
Is of golden complexion, lives on little food,1203
Has broad hips, and is pure, {15.130}
15.­131
“Compassionate, caring, skillful, [F.185.b] [F.202.b]
Knowing in the ways of the world, highly esteemed for his qualities,
Always dedicated to reciting the mantras,
Willing to give up his life for the victorious lords1204 {15.131}
15.­132
“And also for their sons, the śrāvakas,
As well as to the pratyeka­buddhas;
Who is mighty, eminent among men,
Belongs to the pure second caste,1205 {15.132}
15.­133
“And is complete with all the limbs of his body,
Always cruel and rash,1206
Detached, disciplined, victorious over his enemies,
And able to distinguish between virtue and nonvirtue; {15.133}
15.­134
“And who is not too hefty and not too lean,
Not too tall and not too short,
And preeminent among the average
Will attain accomplishment of the highest kind. {15.134}
15.­135
“One with copper-colored, smooth fingernails,
With the palms of his hands red and clean,
With the extremities of his feet red and smooth,
And adorned with circles, swastikas, {15.135}
15.­136
“Banners, archways, fish,
Flags, lotuses, and water lilies
Visible on his hands and feet‍—
A person marked with these signs {15.136}
15.­137
“And fitting this description is the most excellent,
And to his lot will fall the best accomplishment.
One with white, cavity-free,
And long teeth that resemble mountains; {15.137}
15.­138
“With a long nose, elongated eyes,
Knitted brow, a beautiful chin,
Eyelashes distinguished in the world like those of a cow,
Black, beautifully outlined eyes, {15.138}
15.­139
“A broad forehead,
A beautiful head shaped like a parasol
Or shaped like a turban,
Beautiful ears, {15.139}
15.­140
“Jaws shaped like those of a lion,
Lips the color of ripe bimba1207 fruit,
A tongue the color of a lotus petal,
An intensely red palate,1208 {15.140}
15.­141
“A neck resembling a conch,1209
Full, muscular shoulders,1210
Exquisitely beautiful flanks and bosom,
A broad chest, {15.141}
15.­142
“A slim torso,
Broad, beautiful hips,
A deep navel with hair curling to the right,
A network of straight veins,1211 {15.142}
15.­143
“Dangling forearms, and big arms and hips;1212
Who is distinguished by a lion’s chest,
Has round thighs,
And elbows free of blemish;1213 {15.143}
15.­144
“Whose calves, like those of an antelope,
Are said to be well proportioned and round;
Who has fleshy feet
With red, upraised toes1214 {15.144}
15.­145
“With red, smooth toenails‍—
Feet that are nicely arched and adorned with flesh; [F.186.a] [F.203.a]
Whose head … the surface of the earth;1215
Who has beautiful ears,1216 nice to behold,1217 {15.145}
15.­146
“Smooth,1218 of nice color, clean,
Praiseworthy and distinguished in the world,
Above which there is a network of veins
That are not bulging; {15.146}
15.­147
“Whose two pathways for voiding excreta
Are deep1219 and turn toward the right;
Who has two fine testicles,1220
Small, round, beautiful, {15.147}
15.­148
“Without injuries or cracks,
And nicely separated;
Whose member becomes drawn in
After voiding the bodily fluid at the end of physical passion;1221 {15.148}
15.­149
“Who, during sleep,1222 after the eating of
Aphrodisiacs contained in food or drink,
Profusely releases a fluid
That appears blue or red; {15.149}
15.­150
“And whose [penis] releases much fluid, is smooth,1223
And is marked with signs of beauty‍—
The person of this kind
Will attain the highest accomplishment. {15.150}
15.­151
“One who defecates three times and urinates six times [a day1224],1225
Is pure and enjoys performing purificatory observances,
Goes to bed at the end of the watch,1226
And gets up early
Will attain the highest accomplishment
With regard to all activities.1227 {15.151}
15.­152
“One will enjoy
A variety of results
And great prosperity again and again.
One is marked with medium characteristics,1228
If one is born in the asterisms
Of Puṣya, Revatī, Phalgunī, {15.152}
15.­153
“Maghā, Anurādhā, Citrā,
Rohiṇī, or Kṛttikā.
One born in them is handsome,
And marked by the planets as capable.1229
One that was [born under the aforementioned stars] at dawn
Will manifest accomplishment.1230 {15.153}
15.­154
“If the auspicious planets‍—
The pure white moon,1231
The yellow Mercury, and Jupiter‍—
Are observed at the end of the day, at midday, or at dawn,
They indicate, for all people born at that time,
That they will be fit for attaining accomplishment. {15.154}
15.­155
“If people born in such periods
Engage in virtuous activities,
Their mantras will easily succeed
In accomplishing all their aims. {15.155}
15.­156
“After noon has passed
And always when the sun is setting‍—
Always during these periods‍— [F.186.b] [F.203.b]
Planets exercise cruel influence upon beings.1232 {15.156}
15.­157
“Sun and Mars are, [at that time], inauspicious,
As are comets, Rāhu, and Saturn,
The chief among planets,
Earthquakes, hurricanes, and meteors.1233 {15.157}
15.­158
“At that time the stars are very inauspicious.
Black omens boding misfortune
And fearful portents of death
Will appear at that time. {15.158}
15.­159
“If, at the time of the sun’s rising,
Mercury looks upon Earth;1234
If at a yoke’s distance1235 from the sun,
Jupiter looks upon Earth;1236 {15.159}
15.­160
“If Venus, a further yoke’s distance away from the sun,
Is looked upon by Kubera;
If, at the height of noon,
The moon’s aspect affects the beings, {15.160}
15.­161
“Then, respectively, Mercury’s influence will bring kingship;
Jupiter will bring wealth and pleasures;
Venus will bring wealth,
Kingdom, and pleasures; {15.161}
15.­162
“And the moon will bring long life,
Power, and achievements.
Similarly, when the sun marks the midday,
Its corresponding midday aspect manifests.1237
When noon has passed,
The sun always looks upon the quarters. {15.162}
15.­163
“If Ketu1238 is said to be within
One angular yoke [above the horizon], not higher,1239
And if Rāhu and Saturn
Create darkness at noon,1240
Soon after evil omens will occur,
Such as meteors or earthquakes.1241 {15.163}
15.­164
“If the setting sun is of copper color,
With a strong tint of vermillion,1242
One born under this aspect of the chief planet1243
Will be a handsome male child. {15.164}
15.­165
“He will look like Mars himself,
Very fierce, with a javelin in his hand.
Then, when the sun has passed a yoke’s length,
The auspicious planets will emerge. {15.165}
15.­166
“One born after the sun has appeared
Will be cruel and impetuous.
If it is Saturn or Mars,
One will be cruel, lustful, and proud. {15.166}
15.­167
“Harm will come to those born
Under the smoke-like omens of Ketu.
Such people are poor, violent, and greedy,1244
And are always ignorant. {15.167}
15.­168
“In the time of darkness, when the earth shakes,
Meteors streak, and planets are inauspicious;
When there are earthquakes and hurricanes,
Light-phenomena, and burning thunderbolts;1245 {15.168} [F.187.a] [F.204.a]
15.­169
“When ominous lightning and other signs
Appear in place of the Pleiades and other stars;
When all beings behold
The terrifying sight of Rāhu,1246 {15.169}
15.­170
“At that time people are poor, without a protector, undisciplined,
And constantly engage in evil and dishonest acts.1247
Such people are born into suffering‍—
Their lineament being affliction.
They suffer from leprosy and many diseases,
Such as blindness, lameness, and boils. {15.170}
15.­171
“They are hermaphrodites, neuter, and childless,
Unlucky with and repugnant to women.1248
In this way, men, women, and others
Attest to the inauspiciousness of the planets. {15.171}
15.­172
“They are born in many worlds, having experiences
According to their astrological births.1249
The planets that are ‘white’ and ‘yellow’ are the best;
Being born under them is the source of happiness. {15.172}
15.­173
“As for the colors, the white and the yellow
Have been described by the victorious ones as the best.
Seeing the four main planets‍—
Venus, the moon, Jupiter, and Mercury‍— {15.173}
15.­174
“Will ensure success
For the reciter in all [ritual] activities.
As for the simple folks,
Their births will always be fortunate. {15.174}
15.­175
“Every desired good fortune,1250
As explained by the most eminent of men,
Will be instantly obtained,
Within the twinkling of an eye or a finger snap. {15.175}
15.­176
“Their birth-assigned position has been described in brief
By the most eminent of men.
Its limitations and standards are determined
By the planets who oversee the world. {15.176}
15.­177
“These planets rise regularly
At their usual time, as is their nature.
Auspicious or inauspicious, they always
Course in their orbits. {15.177}
15.­178
“Beings perform evil and virtue,
And thus inhabit their specific realms.1251
They may inhabit the gods’ realms,1252 {15.178}
15.­179
“But somehow, to some degree,
They will develop evil intents.
Wholesome and unwholesome results
Will thus arise for them again and again. {15.179}
15.­180
“It is said that, according to their aspects,
The planets incite karma and cause it be experienced.1253
Swiftly, swiftly they catch up with beings;
Swiftly, swiftly they approach. {15.180}
15.­181
“Visible or not, their speedy approach happens instantaneously,
In the twinkling of an eye or a finger snap‍—
That is the exact amount of time
Described by those of superior intellect.1254 {15.181} [F.187.b] [F.204.b]
15.­182
“Next I will explain
What the birth horoscope always entails‍—
The twelve moments [favorable for undertaking an activity]
And the appropriate and inappropriate time in relation to causes.
I will also explain who is not a suitable vessel,
Or does not possess the causes for accomplishment.1255 {15.182}
15.­183
“Favorable omens, in turns, appear
And do not appear to people.
Kingdoms collapse, there are famines,
Or there are bountiful harvests,1256 and kings enjoy prosperity.1257 {15.183}
15.­184
“A person destined to die, whether a timely or untimely death,
Should always act benevolently.1258
When there are comets, earthquakes, and hurricanes,
When meteors streak and smoke is present, {15.184}
15.­185
“The behavior of constellations, days of the week, and stars,
Which is either virtuous or nonvirtuous,
Influences the conduct of every being,
Which oscillates between good or bad. {15.185}
15.­186
“I will now describe the behavior‍—
Of the kravyādas and the mātṛs,
Those fierce murderers of living beings‍—
And other evil beings who feed on flesh.1259 {15.186}
15.­187
“Those with sincere faith in the deity,
Rich in Dharma and of superior intellect,
Who are always engaged in wholesome activities
And cultivate thoughts of loving kindness and compassion, {15.187}
15.­188
“Who use their intellects for the sake of noble endeavors
And dedicate themselves to fulfilling the needs of others,1260
Can summon the mātṛs by uttering the mantra1261
In order to nourish them with food. {15.188}
15.­189
“I will describe in detail the manner
In which they take possession
Of the bodies of others,
And how they remain in the bodies of humans.1262 {15.189}
15.­190
“The gods are said to be rooted in merit,
And the asuras in pride.
They thus abide in these two ways,
Known as gods and asuras,1263 along with their retinues.1264 {15.190}
15.­191
“The latter are further subdivided
Into two, the cruel and the ordinary.
The last are also subdivided into two groups,
The virtuous and the nonvirtuous, [liable to follow] the five destinies.1265 {15.191}
15.­192
“The gods there are of three kinds‍—
‘Twenty,’ ‘thirty,’ and ‘infinite’‍—
The sovereign gods up to the realm of Akaniṣṭha,
The Yāma gods, and the innumerable earth guardians.1266 {15.192}
15.­193
“The worlds are infinite‍—
Both virtuous and nonvirtuous.
Therein dwell saṃsāric beings
And also the noble śrāvakas, {15.193}
15.­194
“The buddhas, the pratyeka­buddhas,
And their dear offspring‍—[F.188.a] [F.205.a]
The bodhisattva great beings‍—
Established on the ten levels. {15.194}
15.­195
“Thus all beings always take
Their respective types of birth.
All the immature beings
Follow the birth of the destinies.
All the noble buddhas, on the other hand,
Are liberated from the ocean of saṃsāra.1267 {15.195}
15.­196
“They all necessarily have their characteristics,
Always follow their respective modes of conduct,
Speak their own languages, and possess latent natures.
I will explain this in detail. {15.196}
15.­197
“All spirits can be summoned
By those who correctly employ the mantra methods.1268
One who knows the mantras for summoning and possession
Can use them on beings who inhabit the bodies of others. {15.197}
15.­198
“They can be summoned, in the human realm,
By mantra reciters who can distinguish
Between virtuous and nonvirtuous activities,
Are not careless, keep reciting the mantra,1269
Do not follow foolish conduct,
And are equally tolerant of disfavor and kindness. {15.198}
15.­199
“I will explain all the signs that indicate success
According to their respective natures.
In order to protect their human bodies
That are always afflicted by suffering,1270 {15.199}
15.­200
“And for the sake of the infinite Dharma
And their own liberation, it is always recommended1271
That they ward off evil beings,
And worship the pure ones. {15.200}
15.­201
“A mantra method is thus prescribed
For keeping the former in check or showing the latter favor.
In this regard, the ritual procedure is threefold,
Reflecting the three natures of either wind, phlegm, or bile. {15.201}
15.­202
“To those afflicted, one should administer the rite of pacifying,
Which is known to be threefold.
In the case of humans, one should always
Administer the remedy by means of the mantras. {15.202}
15.­203
“A living being is a combination of the great elements,
But is regarded as more than just these elements.
When they are overcome by any of these elements,
They are referred to as one who has an element in excess. {15.203}
15.­204
“When a living being has any of the elements in excess,
They will develop an illness.
Elements, in regard to their type,
Are divided into two types. {15.204}
15.­205
“Thus, an element is always designated
As either sattva or asattva.1272
These elements are bile, phlegm, wind,
And any other of the great variety of substances.1273 {15.205}
15.­206
“The great elements are four,
Or five, if space is added.
Water, which is paired with heat,
And earth, which is paired with wind, {15.206}
15.­207
“Have been declared by the wise ones [F.188.b] [F.205.b]
As belonging to the category of asattva,
And so did the most eminent lord of the world,
The one of great splendor. {15.207}
15.­208
“This best of speakers, the most intelligent one,
Has said that asattva elements are associated with
Nonhuman beings,1274
And the sattva elements, with humans.1275 {15.208}
15.­209
“Whether a being is human or nonhuman,
They are always called a sentient being.
It is for the good of sentient beings
That this omniscient teaching was delivered. {15.209}
15.­210
“The past and future buddhas,
And also those of the present time,
Taught about activities
That produce good and bad results. {15.210}
15.­211
“The teaching of the buddhas states
That activity always produces results.
Being in the same category, the accomplishment
Will therefore definitely manifest itself. {15.211}
15.­212
“This accomplishment is said to be omniscient knowledge,
Forbearance, tranquility, consistent purity,
Certainty that phenomena are pure and devoid of self,
The ultimate truth, and liberation. {15.212}
15.­213
“This very path has been taught
For sentient beings in this sūtra,1276
Which contains the true medicine of the mantra‍—
A complete teaching for this world.1277 {15.213}
15.­214
“Venerated in all the treatises
Of the past, the present, and the future,
This teaching concerns the absence of self in phenomena,
Which is a state always tranquil and auspicious. {15.214}
15.­215
“This teaching of the omniscient one
Truly concerns his own highest state.
It alone sets down the way
For the arising of omniscient knowledge. {15.215}
15.­216
“The power of all the buddhas
And the bodhisattvas who are full of wisdom
Manifests itself as an accomplishment
In all activities that involve the mantras.
It is in order to bring about this accomplishment
That this king of manuals has been taught by the lord of sages. {15.216}
15.­217
“Following this path meant for embodied beings,
Which is the essence of mantra,
One can attain the city of nirvāṇa,
A tranquil place where there is no aging,1278
No grief, and no pollution, which is a peaceful,
Always auspicious state of awakening. {15.217}
15.­218
“This instruction of all the buddhas,
Intended for the mantra reciters,
Has been taught for them on the earth
As a complete system. {15.218}
15.­219
“It establishes the karmic cause
For the omniscient knowledge of things. [F.189.a] [F.206.a]
The entire purpose of mantra
Is directed toward the three aspects of awakening.1279 {15.219}
15.­220
“The entirety of the knowledge possessed by the buddhas
Has been explained in this manual.
It has been spread through all the worlds
For the benefit of sentient beings. {15.220}
15.­221
“Certain things found in this king of manuals
Cannot be found in other manuals,1280
But whatever has been taught by the best of sages
And their sons in other manuals, {15.221}
15.­222
“All of that, all the mantras, can be found in this manual.
This then is a detailed manual.
For this very reason the lord of sages
Taught it to all beings. {15.222}
15.­223
“There is no one on this earth,
Or in the triple universe,
Who would not be attracted to
And enthralled by this king of manuals.1281 {15.223}
15.­224
“When the moon-like Sage is gone
And the maṇḍala of this earth is empty,
This manual will remain in the world
And keep fulfilling the purpose of the doctrine. {15.224}
15.­225
“The divine youth Mañjughoṣa,
Who is always pure,
Will continue to do the Buddha’s work
And spread the doctrine to all the beings. {15.225}
15.­226
“Those who, for a long time, have been thirsting
For the power of this king of manuals,
Will be liberated having heard it just once.
They will certainly attain accomplishment. {15.226}
15.­227
“This teaching bears fruit for all beings
And is always pure.1282
Mantra practitioners always delight in the recitation and the homa
Performed for the sake of all beings.1283 {15.227}
15.­228
“Whatever knowledge is contained
In the types of knowledge present in the three times,
The same knowledge can be found
In this supreme king of manuals. {15.228}
15.­229
“The instructions of the buddhas
Taught in this manual are founded on mantras.
These mantras are nonconceptual,
Yet they have been taught in this ‘conceptual’ manual.1284 {15.229}
15.­230
“Every sentient being commits virtue and nonvirtue,
Whether with or without purpose.
The virtue and nonvirtue present in all the worlds
Accord with the intellect of beings particular to their type of birth.1285 {15.230}
15.­231
“He1286 has been elaborated on in this manual
By the tathāgatas, themselves free from mental elaboration.
He was taught here for the sake of the world
By the self-awakened buddhas who transcended the world.1287 {15.231} [F.189.b] [F.206.b]
15.­232
“Transcending the worldly
And surpassing all dharmas,
[He, the supreme] performer, does various things
That are wonderful and venerated by the world.1288 {15.232}
15.­233
“This king of mantras engages in these activities
For the benefit of large numbers of beings.
He, Mañjughoṣa the divine youth,
Carries out the Buddha’s work. {15.233}
15.­234
“There is both virtue and nonvirtue in the world‍—
His purpose is to spread good qualities.
If I am requested, I will teach;
Not requesting is said to be non-Dharma.1289 {15.234}
15.­235
“It is taught by the Buddha
Solely for the benefit of every being.
It has been taught by the past buddhas
And will now be taught by me1290 {15.235}
15.­236
“With the earnest desire that the lineage
Of the buddhas remains unbroken,
And that omniscient wisdom arises
In all activities of the mantra practitioners. {15.236}
15.­237
“The only activity that deserves to be praised
Is the one based on omniscient knowledge.
Since previous actions performed in one’s respective world
Are being experienced now,1291 {15.237}
15.­238
“One should perform the [right] activities,
Though it may be difficult to perform them in this life.
Based on these activities, the mantras will succeed
Without effort even in this life. {15.238}
15.­239
“The accomplishment will come in this life,
Manifesting also in one’s activity.1292
The ritual activity is therefore
Extolled by all the buddhas as something unique. {15.239}
15.­240
“When such activity is performed according to procedure,
The accomplishment will swiftly follow, even in this life.
Naive and careless beings,
Who are ignorant of the right procedure, follow erroneous paths. {15.240}
15.­241
“Thus these activities alone, with all their aspects,
Have been deemed praiseworthy.
The activity should follow the procedure;
If it does, it will be successful.1293
Activity that lacks the right procedure
Will not succeed even after a very long time.1294 {15.241}
15.­242
“There is no liberation without samādhi;
Liberation is never devoid of samādhi.
Accordingly, awakening is said
To combine samādhi and liberation.” {15.242}
15.­243

This concludes the chapter with detailed instructions on the meaning of all ritual activities, fifteenth in “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings. [F.190.a] [F.207.a]


16.

Chapter 16

16.­1

The blessed Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Mañjuśrī! Requested by the wise king of yakṣas who holds a vajra in his hand, I already taught in detail, in the middle of this assembly, your complete chapter1295 on the ritual activities intended for all purposes.1296 {16.1}

16.­2
“I taught about the good and bad aspects of dreams
And how they relate to all the mantra purposes.
I taught all of it at length
For the mantra reciters.”1297 {16.2}

17.

Chapter 17

17.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni entered the samādhi called the magical display of all the tathāgatas. As soon as he entered this samādhi, rays of blue, yellow, dazzling white, red, and crystal-colored light issued from the tuft of hair between his eyebrows. They brightened the entire buddhafield and illuminated the interior of every realm of the universe, while darkening all the planets and constellations and summoning them in an instant. After summoning them, the light assigned them to their respective places and drew them, by the power of the Buddha’s blessing, into the circle of the assembly. It then disappeared into the same tuft of hair between Lord Śākyamuni’s eyebrows. All the planets, constellations, and stars, their light blocked, approached Lord Śākyamuni, pained and frightened. They stood with folded hands, trembling and prostrating themselves on the ground again and again. {17.1}


24.

Chapter 24

24.­1

1359The blessed Śākyamuni now addressed all the most important grahas among the constellations, planets, stars, and celestial bodies that exist in all the world spheres‍—the grahas dwelling in all the directions and endowed with great magical powers: {24.1} [F.194.a] [F.211.a]

24.­2

“Listen, venerable friends, to my presentation on the respective powers of all the planets and constellations. Show your power, sirs, and accomplish the purpose of all the rituals involving the mantra. Keep your samayas and eagerly pursue an accomplishment in the doctrine contained in this sovereign manual of Mañjughoṣa and later expounded in other manuals as well.” {24.2}


25.

Chapter 25

25.­1

Lord Śākyamuni once again addressed the planets, the nakṣatras, the stars, and other celestial bodies: {25.1}

25.­2

“Please listen, all of you, venerable sirs, the planets and the nakṣatras!1487 This sovereign manual of the divine youth Mañjuśrī, which contains ritual instructions on the empowerment and the maṇḍala according to the mantra system,1488 should not be transgressed against. You honored celestial bodies should not obstruct the knowledge holders trained in this supreme manual who engage in the practice of recitation, homa,1489 the observance of rules, and magic. [F.203.b] [F.220.b] Nor should you hinder the insights gained by the calculations of the behavior (carita) of the asterisms and nakṣatras.1490 Instead, you and the hosts of gods should all protect those who engage in the instructions thereof. All the wicked beings should be warded off, restrained,1491 and properly instructed. None of them should be hurt in any way. [Instead,] they should be established in the stages of this doctrine that confers the ten powers.” {25.2}


26.

Chapter 26

26.­1

At that time Blessed Śākyamuni, looking again1521 at the realm of the Pure Abode, addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to my short teaching on the painting procedure of One Syllable‍—the cakravartin of great power. This procedure was previously taught at length, but now only briefly.1522 {26.1}

26.­2

“During this lowest eon beings have little diligence or wisdom, and are rather dull. They would be unable to successfully execute the painting in its extensive version.1523 {26.2}


27.

Chapter 27

27.­1

At that time, the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and the hosts of gods dwelling there, as well as all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyeka­buddhas, and the noble śrāvakas, and once again addressed Mañjuśrī the divine youth: {27.1}

27.­2

“This complete basket of teachings of all the tathāgatas, O Mañjuśrī, is as illustrious as a wish-fulfilling gem. It is taught in order to make beings into receptacles wherein results will be born.1616 During the lowest eon, at the time when the buddhafield is empty, [F.215.a] [F.232.a] the tathāgatas are in the state of nirvāṇa and the genuine Dharma tools have disappeared. At such a time, in order to preserve the mantra basket of all the tathāgatas’ teachings, this One Syllable, O Mañjuśrī, taught in this king of manuals of your mantra methods, the manual of the divine youth, will become a shared treasure, which, when recited according to procedure, will fulfill the wishes of all beings.1617 This cakravartin, One Syllable, taught in your king of manuals, constitutes the essential core of the mantra systems of all the tathāgatas and is the most prominent [part of] them. When one recites him, all the tathāgata-vidyārājas1618 are being recited. {27.2}


28.

Chapter 28

28.­1

Now the blessed Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your ritual a painting procedure‍—a sādhana aid that accomplishes all activities. The ritual performed in front of this painting1685 should employ the aforementioned one-syllable heart mantra, or the six-syllable mantra that ends with ma, or your six-syllable root mantra that starts with oṁ, or the one-syllable mantra.1686 This king of rites will become the means of protection in the future time, when I, the Tathāgata, am in parinirvāṇa and the buddhafield is empty‍—at the time when the lowest eon has arrived, and the world is without protection or refuge, and with nothing to resort to. This king of rites will then become the refuge, the succor, the place of rest, and the final resort. What is this rite? {28.1}


29.

Chapter 29

29.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {29.1}

29.­2

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in this division of your ritual prescriptions, a seventh [set of] rites involving a painting that will be effective at the end of the [dark] eon and will without fail lead to accomplishment. This accomplishment will include the arising and maturing of happiness, the knowledge of the physical world, and the forestalling of all painful destinies, and it will certainly lead to awakening.” {29.2}


30.

Chapter 30

30.­1

At that time, the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {30.1} [F.231.a] [F.248.a]

30.­2

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your mantra treatise, a list of places for accomplishing any vidyārāja mantra, starting with the mantra of Cakravartin‍—the foremost among all tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas.1804 In brief, everywhere in the northern regions, the mantras of tathāgata-1805vidyārājas will become accomplished. {30.2}


31.

Chapter 31

31.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and said to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen Mañjuśrī, divine youth, as I teach about the ways of spirits who possess other beings, and the accompanying auspicious and inauspicious signs.” {31.1}

31.­2

Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, prostrated at the feet of the Blessed One, folded his hands, and said to the Blessed One:


32.

Chapter 32

32.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth: {32.1}

32.­2

“Your mantras, Mañjuśrī, hold the key to the complete understanding of all the tantras; they possess the secrets of all the vidyās,1877 and, in consequence, they can also cause the ripening of all the results of good qualities accumulated over a long period of time. I will now authoritatively teach the factors of accomplishment, which are as follows: {32.2}


33.

Chapter 33

33.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {33.1}

33.­2

“Your king of manuals, Mañjuśrī, styled as a nirdeśa,1899 is a treasury of the sphere of phenomena, as it proceeds from the sphere of phenomena, which is the essence of the tathāgatas. This great sūtra, precious as a jewel, is divided into detailed sections. It is sanctioned [to teach] the greatest secrets of the tathāgatas and brings accomplishment of the supreme mantras. It contains auxiliary practices pertaining to the knowledge of signs and the rules for ascertaining the right time.1900 [It also explains] the voices of all the [different] beings, differentiating the sounds made by sentient and insentient entities. {33.2}


34.

Chapter 34

34.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to the divine youth Mañjuśrī as follows: {34.1}

34.­2

“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to your most esoteric and secret teaching on your mudrās and mantras. No followers of your mantra path should ever disclose this teaching to people who have no trust and no faith in the doctrine of the Tathāgata; to people who do not have the authorizing samaya or do not maintain the continuity of the lineage of the Three Jewels; to people who are in bad company; to people who do not desire religious merit; to people who interact and mix with evil companions or are surrounded by bad friends; to people who distance themselves from the Buddha’s teaching; to people who have not been instructed by their master and so this manual would bring no results for them; to people, divine youth, who have not been initiated into your supreme and most secret maṇḍala; or to people who do not observe their samaya or who have no connection to the family of the Tathāgata. {34.2}


35.

Chapter 35

35.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode [F.245.a] [F.262.a] and entered the samādhi called that which animates the great receptacle of mudrās of the tathāgatas. As soon as he entered this samādhi, a great light issued from the tuft of hair between his eyebrows. This mass of light, surrounded by innumerable billions of light rays, illuminated many buddhafields, arousing all the buddhas [dwelling there], and entered back into Lord Śākyamuni’s tuft of hair. {35.1}


36.

Chapter 36

36.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, a most secret mudrā presentation that includes your root2238 mudrā and its assorted mudrās. [These mudrās] may be employed in all rites. In short, they bring every kind of good fortune and produce results; they supplement every mantra and accomplish the aim of every activity. {36.1}


37.

Chapter 37

37.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {37.1}

37.­2

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your root manual, another most secret mudrā. Its ritual procedure [represents] the entire mudrā system. [F.259.b] [F.276.b] It is recommended for all the mantras and can be employed with any of them. It accomplishes all rites and purifies the path to perfect awakening.2254 It destroys all the paths that lead to saṃsāric existence. It sustains all beings and grants long life, freedom from disease, and powerful sense faculties. It fulfills all wishes and gives rise to all the factors of awakening. It gives joy to all beings and produces the results they all wish and hope for. It fulfills all activities and makes all mantras efficacious. It comprises all the other mudrās and mantras. Listen, Mañjuśrī, divine youth! {37.2}


38.

Chapter 38

38.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen, Mañjuśrī!

“Briefly, there are detailed [teachings on] the characteristics of the mudrās and the mantras, the procedures of the maṇḍalas and the association-based2456 distribution of mudrās therein, and the secret maṇḍala of all the mantra [deities] in all the tantras.2457 {38.1}

38.­2
“All of them were taught before
By every buddha of great majesty.
The exalted function of the mantras
Was explained for each of the families2458
By the former buddhas from the earliest time
To bring benefit to sentient beings. {38.2}

50.

Chapter 50

50.­1

2485At that time Blessed Vajrapāṇi, the general of the yakṣas who was in the assembly, got up from his seat, draped his upper robe over the left shoulder, placed his right knee on the ground, bowed2486 to the Blessed One with his palms pressed together, and made the following request: {50.1}

50.­2

“O Blessed One! You have not fully explained2487 the ritual of the lord of wrath called Yamāntaka that was taught by Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Nor has Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, explained it. I request you, Blessed One, to teach this ritual, out of regard for human beings during the final age, so that, at the time when you are in the state of complete nirvāṇa, when the teachings have disappeared, during the dreadful time of the worst age when the buddhafield is completely devoid of śrāvakas and pratyeka­buddhas, the teachings of the tathāgatas may be preserved, the domain of the Dharma may remain for a long time, all wicked kings may be subdued, those who harm the Three Jewels may be suppressed, the inconceivable bodhisattva conduct may bring the virtues of beings who require guidance to completion, and innumerable sentient beings may be brought to complete maturity. {50.2}


51.

Chapter 51

51.­1

At that time Vajrapāṇi, the lord of guhyakas, looked at the entire great assembly and addressed all the hosts of beings seated [in the space] above the realm of the Pure Abode: {51.1}

51.­2

“Listen, honorable friends! For a start I will teach the painting procedure of Lord of Wrath Yamāntaka‍—one of infinite power and courage, the tamer of those difficult to tame, one who terminates the life of Vaivasvata,2540 a great bodhisattva devoted to restraining wicked beings‍—the procedure that was taught by Mañjuśrī.2541 {51.2}


52.

Chapter 52

52.­1

At that time the great being, Bodhisattva Śāntamati, who was sitting in the midst of that great gathering, got up from his seat, bowed to each of the buddhas, and stood in the middle of the assembly. Having circumambulated the blessed Śākyamuni three times clockwise, he bowed at his feet and, looking in the direction of Vajrapāṇi, the great general of the yakṣa army, said: {52.1}

52.­2

“You are exceedingly cruel,2605 Vajrapāṇi, in that you teach mantra methods that are harmful to all sentient beings, or serve to obtain sensual pleasures. It is not proper, O son of the victorious ones, for the bodhisattvas, the great beings, to act like this because bodhisattvas, great beings, are endowed with great compassion and practice bodhisattva conduct. Practicing benevolence for the sake of all beings, they do not cast off the fetters of existence.2606 {52.2}


53.

Chapter 53

53.­1

Blessed Śākyamuni, having now emerged from his samādhi,2758 continued to teach the Dharma to the assembly that resembled a great ocean. There, sitting in front of all the [assembled] beings and hosts of spirits, were uncountable thousands of bodhisattvas, headed by Vajrapāṇi; uncountable thousands of arhats, headed by Śāriputra; innumerable gods devoted to the four great kings, headed by Vaiśravaṇa; innumerable gods from the realm of the Thirty-Three, headed by Śakra; as well as innumerable gods from the realms of Suyāma, Tuṣita, Nirmāṇarati, Paranirmita, Vaśavartin, Brahmakāyika, Brahmapurohita, Mahābrahmā, Parīttābha, Apramāṇa, Ābhāsvara, and so forth, until Puṇyaprasava, Bṛhatphala, Avṛha, Atapas, and Akaniṣṭha. The Blessed One addressed them as follows: {53.1}


54.

Chapter 54

54.­1

Directing his gaze again at the realm of the Pure Abode, the blessed Śākyamuni said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth: {54.1}

54.­2

“Wherever, Mañjuśrī, this Dharma discourse is disseminated, you should know that I am present there myself, surrounded by the hosts of all the bodhisattvas, taking the place of honor among the congregation of śrāvakas, and attended upon by a retinue of all the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, garuḍas, gandharvas, kinnaras, mahoragas, siddhas, vidyādharas, and other nonhuman and human beings. The Tathāgata resides there for the sake of protecting, sheltering, and defending. {54.2}


c.

Colophon

c.­1

By order of the glorious ruler and renunciant king Jangchub O, this text was translated, edited, and finalized by the great Indian preceptor and spiritual teacher Kumārakalaśa and the translator Lotsawa and monk Śākya Lodrö.3397


ap.
Appendix

Sanskrit Text

app.

Introduction to the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa

app.­1

The Sanskrit text presented here is meant to accompany the English translation. It is based on five manuscripts as detailed in the list of abbreviations for this appendix. The default source for the text presented here was Śāstrī’s (Śāstrī 1920–25)3398 published transcript of manuscript T. Variant readings are reported only when they replace Śāstrī’s readings or when deemed relevant. The notes in the critical apparatus list the variants in the order of relevance, departing from the usual practice of listing them in the alphabetical order of the sigla. It is incomplete; it leaves out three blocks of chapters not included in the Tibetan canonical translation.

ap1.

Chapter A1

ap1.­1

{S1} {V1} {B1v} oṁ3399 namaḥ sarva­buddha­bodhi­sattvebhyaḥ ||


evaṃ mayā śrutam ekasmin samaye | bhaga­vāñ śuddhāvāsopari gagana­tala­pratiṣṭhite 'cintyāś­caryādbhuta­pravibhakta­bodhi­sattva­sannipāta­maṇḍala­māḍe3400 viharati sma | tatra bhaga­vāñ śuddhāvāsa­kāyikān deva­putrān āmantrayate sma || 1.1 ||

ap1.­2

śṛṇvantu bhavanto3401 deva­putrāḥ mañjuśriyaḥ3402 kumāra­bhūtasya bodhi­sattvasya mahā­sattvasyācintyādbhuta­prātihārya­caryā­samādhi­rddhi3403viśeṣa­vimokṣa­maṇḍala­bodhi­sattva­vikurvaṇaṃ sarva­sattvopajīvyam āyur ārogyaiśvaryam3404 | manoratha­paripūrakāṇi3405 mantra­padāni sarva­sattvānāṃ hitāya bhāṣiṣye | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye 'haṃ te3406 || 1.2 ||

ap2.

Chapter A2

ap2.­1

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūtaḥ sarvāvantaṃ parṣanmaṇḍalam avalokya sarvasattvasamayānupraveśāvalokinīṃ nāma samādhiṃ samāpadyate sma | samanantarasamāpannasya ca mañjuśriyaḥ kumara­bhūtasya nābhimaṇḍalapradeśād raśmir niścaranti sma | {B25r} anekaraśmi­koṭī­niyuta­śatasahasra­parivāritā samantāt sarvasattvadhātum avabhāsya punar eva taṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanaṃ avabhāsya sthitābhūt || 2.1 ||

ap2.­2

atha khalu vajrapāṇir bodhisattvo mahā­sattvo mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

ap3.

Chapter A3

ap3.­1

atha tṛtīyaḥ parivartaḥ ||

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūtaḥ punar api taṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya tān mahā­parṣanmaṇḍalasannipatitān sarvabuddhabodhisattvān praṇamya • ekākṣaraṃ paramaguhyaṃ sarvaviṣaghātasarvakarmikaṃ ca mantraṃ svamaṇḍalasādhanaupayikaṃ sarvakṣudrakarmeṣu copayojyaṃ bhāṣate sma | katamaṃ ca tat || 3.1 ||

ap3.­2

namaḥ samanta­buddhānām | tadyathā jaḥ | eṣa sa mārṣāḥ sārvabhūtagaṇāś ca asyaiva mantram ekākṣarasya dvitīyaṃ maṇḍalavidhānaṃ saṃkṣepato yojyam || 3.2 ||

ap4.

Chapter A4

ap4.­1

namo buddhāya sarvabuddhabodhisattvebhyaḥ ||

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ sarvāvantaṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya punar api tan mahā­parṣanmaṇḍalasannipātam avalokya śākyamuneś caraṇayor nipatya prahasitavadano bhūtvā bhagavantam etad avocat || 4.1 ||

ap4.­2

tat sādhu bhagavān sarvasattvānāṃ hitāya mantra­caryā­sādhana­vidhānanirhāraniṣyanda­dharma­megha­pravarṣaṇa­yathepsita­phalaniṣpādana­paṭala­visarāt4349 paṭavidhānam anuttarapuṇyaprasavaḥ samyaksambodhibīja4350•abhinirvartakaṃ sarvajñajñānāśeṣa•abhinirvartakam || 4.2 ||

ap5.

Chapter A5

ap5.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvaṃ tatparṣanmaṇḍalam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate4427 sma |

asti mañjuśrīr aparam api tvadīyaṃ madhyamaṃ paṭavidhānam | tad bhāṣiṣye 'ham | śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru || 5.1 ||

ap5.­2

ādau tāvat pūrvanirdiṣṭenaiva sūtrakeṇa pūrvoktenaiva vidhinā pūrvaparikalpitaiḥ śilpibhiḥ pūrvapramāṇaiva madhyamapaṭaḥ suśobhanena śuklena suvratena sadaśena • aśleṣakai raṅgair apagatakeśasaṃkārādibhir yathaiva prathamaṃ tathaiva tat kuryād varjayitvā tu pramāṇarūpakāt tat paṭaṃ paścād abhilikhāpayitavyam || 5.2 ||

ap6.

Chapter A6

ap6.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | asti mañjuśrīr aparam api paṭavidhānarahasyaṃ tṛtīyaṃ kanyasaṃ nāma yaḥ sarvasattvānām ayatnenaiva siddhiṃ gaccheyuḥ || 6.1 ||

ap6.­2

pūrvanirdiṣṭenaiva vidhinā śilpibhiḥ sugatavitastipramāṇaṃ tiryak tathaiva samaṃ caturasraṃ pūrvavat paṭaś citrāpayitavyaḥ pūrvanirdiṣṭai raṅgaiḥ || 6.2 ||

ap6.­3

ādau tāvad ārya­mañjuśrīḥ siṃhāsanopaniṣaṇṇo bāladārakarūpī pūrvavad dharmaṃ deśayamānaḥ samanta­prabhā•arciṣo nirgacchamānaś cārurūpī citrāpayitavyaḥ | vāmapārśve ārya­samanta­bhadro ratnopalasthitaś camaravyagrahastaś cintāmaṇivāmavinyastakaraḥ priyaṅguśyāmavarṇaḥ pūrvavac citrāpayitavyaḥ | dakṣiṇapārśve • ārya­mañjuśriyasya ratnopalasthita āryāvalokiteśvaraḥ | pūrvavac camaravyagrahasto vāmahastāravindavinyastaḥ samanta­dyotitamūrtir abhilekhyaḥ || 6.3 ||

ap7.

Chapter A7

ap7.­1

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūta utthāyāsanād bhagavantaṃ śākya­muniṃ triḥ pradakṣiṇīkṛtya bhagavataś caraṇayor nipatya bhagavantam evam āha ||

sādhu sādhu bhagavatā yas tathāgatenārhatā samyaksambuddhena subhāṣito 'yaṃ dharma­paryāyaḥ sarvavidyāvratacāriṇām arthāya hitāya sukhāya lokānukampāyai | bodhisattvānām upāyakauśalyatā darśitā nirvāṇoparigāminī vartmopaviśeṣā niyataṃ bodhiparāyaṇā saṃtatir bodhisattvānāṃ sarvamantrārthacaryā sādhanīyam | etanmantrarahasyasarvajanavistāraṇakarī bhaviṣyati || 7.1 ||

ap8.

Chapter A8

ap8.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­munir mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

ye te mañjuśrīs tvayā nirdiṣṭā sattvā teṣām arthāya • idaṃ paṭavidhānaṃ visaram ākhyātam | te svalpenaivopāyena sādhayiṣyante | teṣām arthāya sādhanopayikaṃ4498 guṇa­vistāra­prabhedavibhāgaśaḥ karma­vibhāgaṃ samanubhāṣiṣyāmi | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye sarva­sattvānām arthāya || 8.1 ||

ap8.­2

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūto bhaga­vantam etad avocat |

ap9.

Chapter A9

ap9.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvāvatīparṣanmaṇḍalopaniṣaṇṇān deva­saṅghān āmantrayate sma |

śṛṇvantu bhavanto mārṣā mañjuśriyasya kumara­bhūtasya caryāmaṇḍalamantrasādhanopāyikaṃ4509 rakṣārthaṃ sādhakasya paramaguhyatamaṃ paramaguhyahṛdayaṃ sarvatathāgatabhāṣitaṃ mahā­vidyārājaṃ yena japtena sarvamantrā japtā bhavanti || 9.1 ||

ap9.­2

anatikramaṇīyo 'yaṃ bho deva­saṅghā ayaṃ vidyārājā | mañjuśriyo 'pi kumara­bhūto 'nena vidyārājñā • ākṛṣṭo vaśam ānīto sammatībhūtaḥ | kaḥ punarvādaḥ | tadanye bodhisattvā laukikalokottarāś ca mantrāḥ | sarvavighnāṃś ca nāśayaty eṣa mahā­vīryaḥ prabhāva ekavīrya eka • eva sarvamantrāṇām agram ākhyāyate | eka • eva • ekākṣarāṇām akṣaram ākhyāyate | katamaṃ ca tat || 9.2 ||

ap10.

Chapter A10

ap10.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api karmasādhanottamaṃ bhāṣate sma |

iha kalparāje anyatamaṃ mantraṃ gṛhītvā gaṅgāmahā­nadīm avatīrya nauyānasaṃsthitaḥ gaṅgāyā madhye kṣīrodanāhāras triṃśallakṣāṇi japet yatheṣṭadivasaiḥ | tato japānte sarvān nāgān paśyati | tataḥ sādhanam ārabhet4521 | tatraiva naumadhye agnikuṇḍaṃ kārayet padmākāram | tato nāgakesarapuṣpaiḥ paṭasya mahatīṃ pūjāṃ kṛtvā jyeṣṭhaṃ paṭaṃ paścānmukhaṃ pratiṣṭhāpya ātmanaś ca pūrvābhimukhaṃ kuśaviṇḍakopaviṣṭo nāgakesarapuṣpam ekaikaṃ saptābhimantritaṃ kṛtvā khadirakāṣṭhendhanāgniprajvālite juhuyād yāvat triṃśasahasrāṇi śvetacandanakuṅkumapūtānāṃ nāgakesarapuṣpānāṃ4522 nānyeṣām | nāgānāṃ darśanam avekṣyam | siddhadravyaiś ca pralobhayanti | na grahītavyāni || 10.1 ||

ap11.

Chapter A11

ap11.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyaṃ madhyamaṃ paṭavidhānaṃ madhyamakarmopayikasādhanavidhiḥ | samāsatas tāṃ bhāṣiṣye | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye || 11.1 ||

ap11.­2

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūto bhagavantam evam āhuḥ |

tad vadatu bhagavān lokānukampakaḥ śāstā sarvasattvahite rato yasyedānīṃ kālaṃ manyase | asmākam anukampārtham anāgatānāṃ ca janatām avekṣya || 11.2 ||

ap12.

Chapter A12

ap12.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api sarvāvantaṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma ||

śṛṇu tvaṃ mañjuśrīs tvadīyaṃ vidyāmantrānusāriṇāṃ sakalasattvārthasamprayuktānāṃ sattvānāṃ yena jāpyante mantrā yena vā jāpyante • akṣasūtravidhiṃ sarvatantreṣu sāmānyasādhanopayikasarvamantrāṇām | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye || 12.1 ||

ap12.­2

evam ukte mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūto bhagavantam etad avocat |

ap13.

Chapter A13

ap13.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api4723 śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | asti mañjuśrīḥ tvadīya4724mantra­paṭala­samasta­vinyasta­viśeṣavidhinā homakarmaṇi prayuktasya vidyāsādhakasya • agnyupacaryā4725viśeṣavidhānato yatra pratiṣṭhitā sarvavidyācaryāniyuktāḥ sattvāḥ prayujyante | katamaṃ ca tat | rahasyavidyāmantrapadāni | tadyathā ||4726 13.1 ||

ap13.­2

{A27v3}4727 oṁ uttiṣṭha4728 haripiṅgala lohitākṣa dehi dadāpaya hūṃ phaṭ phaṭ sarvavighnān vināśaya svāhā ||

ap14.

Chapter A14

ap14.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyavidyā­rahasya­sādhanopayika­sarva­mantrāṇāṃ samanujñas tathāgatadharmakośavisṛta dharmameghānupraviṣṭa gagana­svabhāva sarva­mantrāṇāṃ laukika­lokottarāṇāṃ prabhur jyeṣṭhatamo yathā kumāraḥ sarvasattvānām | tathāgato 'tra •ākhyāyate jyeṣṭhatamaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ | devamanuṣyāṇāṃ puruṣaṛṣabho buddho bhagavān evaṃ hi kumāra sarvamantrāṇām ayaṃ vidyārājā • agram ākhyāyate śreṣṭhatamaḥ | pūrvanirdiṣṭaṃ tathāgatair anabhilāpyair gaṅgānadīsikatapuṇyair buddhair bhagavadbhī ratnaketos tathāgatasya paramahṛdayaṃ paramaguhyaṃ sarva­maṅgalasammata­sarva­buddha­saṃstuta­praśastaṃ sarvabuddha sattvasamāśvāsakaṃ sarvapāpapraṇāśakaṃ sarvakāmadaṃ sarvāśāparipūrakam | katamaṃ ca tat || 14.1 ||

ap15.

Chapter A15

ap15.­1

atha khalu vajrapāṇir bodhisattvo mahā­sattvas tatraiva parṣanmadhye saṃnipatito 'bhūt | saṃniṣaṇṇaḥ sa utthāyāsanād bhagavantaṃ triḥ pradakṣiṇīkṛtya bhagavataś caraṇayor nipatya bhagavantam etad avocat || 15.1 ||

ap15.­2

sādhu sādhu bhagavan | sudeśitaṃ suprakāśitaṃ paramasubhāṣitaṃ vidyāmantraprayogamahā­dharmameghavinisṛtaṃ sarvatathāgatahṛdayaṃ mahā­vidyārājacakravartinamahā­kalpavistarasarvārtha4832pāripūrakaṃ saphalaṃ sampādakabodhimārganiruttaraṃ kriyābheda­saṃdhya­japa­homa­vidya­caryānuvartināṃ mārgaṃ dṛṣṭa­phala­karma­pratyayajanitahetunimitta­mahādbhuta­daśa­balākramaṇa­kuśala­bodhi­maṇḍa-m-ākramaṇaniyataparāyaṇam | tat sādhu bhagavān vadatu śāstā mantrasādhanānukūlāni svapnasaṃdarśanakālanimittam yena vidyāsādhakānuvartinaḥ sattvāḥ siddhinimittaṃ karma • ārabheyuḥ saphalāś ca sarvavidyāḥ karmanimittāni bhavanti-r-iti || 15.2 ||

ap16.

Chapter A16

ap16.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya4907 mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ | tvadīye sarvārthakriyākarmapaṭalavisaraṃ pūrvanirdiṣṭaṃ parṣanmaṇḍalamadhye savistaraṃ vakṣye 'ham | pṛṣṭo 'yaṃ yakṣarājena vajrahastena dhīmatā || 16.1 ||

ap16.­2
sarvamantrārthayuktānāṃ svapnānāṃ ca śubhāśubham |
ata prasaṅgena sarvedaṃ kathitaṃ mantrajāpinām || 16.2 ||
ap16.­3
yakṣarāṭ tuṣṭamanaso mūrdhni kṛtvā tu • añjalim |
praṇamya śirasā śāstur abhyuvāca girāṃ tadā4908 || 16.3 ||
ap17.

Chapter A17

ap17.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvatathāgatavikurvitaṃ nāma samādhiṃ samāpadyate sma | samanantarasamāpannasya bhagavataḥ śākyamuner ūrṇākośād raśmayo niścarati sma | nīlapītāvadātamāñjiṣṭhasphaṭikavarṇaḥ | sarvaṃ cedaṃ budhakṣetram avabhāsya sarvalokadhātvantarāṇi cālokayitvā sarvagrahanakṣatrāṃś ca muhūrtamātreṇa jihmīkṛtyākṛṣṭavān4928 | ākṛṣṭā ca svakasvakā sthānāni saṃniyojya tat parṣanmaṇḍalaṃ buddhādhiṣṭhānenākṛṣya ca tatraiva bhagavataḥ śākyamuner ūrṇākośāntardhīyate sma | sarvaṃ ca grahanakṣatratārakāḥ • jyotiṣo-r-uparudhyamānā ārtā bhītā bhagavantaṃ śākya­muniṃ prajagmuḥ | kṛtāñjalayaś ca tasthure prakampayamānā muhur muhuś ca dharaṇitale prapatanamānāḥ || 17.1 ||

ap24.

Chapter A24

ap24.­1

4945atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvanakṣatragrahatārakajyotiṣāṃ sarvaloka­dhātuparyāpannānāṃ sarvadigvyavasthitān sarvamaharddhikotkṛṣṭatarāṅ grahān4946 āmantrayate sma || 24.1 ||

ap24.­2

śṛṇvantu bhavanto mārṣāḥ sarva­graha­nakṣatra­prabhāva­svavākyaṃ4947 | prabhāvaṃ nirdeśayituṃ4948 bhavantaḥ | sarvamantrakriyārthāṃ sādhayantu4949 bhavantaḥ | samaye ca tiṣṭhantu bhavantaḥ4950 | iha kalparāje mañjughoṣasya śāsane siddhiṃ parataś cānyāṃ kalparājāṃsi • autsukyamānā bhavantu bhavanta iti || 24.2 ||

ap25.

Chapter A25

ap25.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api grahanakṣatratārakajyotiṣagaṇān āmantrayate sma || 25.1 ||

ap25.­2

+ + + + śṛṇvantu bhavantaḥ sarve | anatikramaṇīyo 'yaṃ kalparājā mañjuśriyaḥ kumara­bhūtasya mantratantrābhiṣekamaṇḍalavidhānaṃ | na ca5305 japahomaniyamavidyāsādhanapravṛttānām asmiṃ kalpavare vidyādharāṇāṃ tithinakṣatracaritagaṇitām abhijñānāṃ nakṣatrabhavadbhiḥ vighnaṃ kartavyam | pravṛttānāṃ śāsane 'smin sarvaiś ca devasaṅghais tatra rakṣā kāryā | sarve ca duṣṭasattvāni niṣeddhavyāni roddhavyāni śāsayitavyāni | sarve sarvaṃ na ghātayitavyāni | vyavasthāsu ca sthāpayitavyāni śāsane 'smin daśabalānām || 25.2 ||

ap26.

Chapter A26

ap26.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | śṛṇu mañjuśrīr ekākṣaracakravartinasya mahānubhāvasya saṃkṣepeṇa paṭavidhānaṃ bhavati | vistaraśaḥ pūrvam udīritam adhunā saṃkṣepeṇa || 26.1 ||

ap26.­2

yugādhame sattvā alpavīryā bhavanti • alpaprajñā mandacetasaḥ | na śakyante vistaraśaḥ paṭapramāṇaprayogaṃ sādhayitum || 26.2 ||

ap26.­3
saṃkṣepeṇa vakṣye 'haṃ sattvānāṃ hitakāmyayā |
uttamārthaṃ tu yathā siddhiṃ5321 prāpnuvanti sa jāpinaḥ || 26.3 ||
ap27.

Chapter A27

ap27.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya tatrasthāṃś ca devasaṅghān sarvāṃś ca buddhabodhisattvā pratyeka­buddhāryaśrāvakān punar api mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 27.1 ||

ap27.­2

nirdiṣṭo 'yaṃ mañjuśrīḥ sarvatathāgatānāṃ sarvasvabhūtaṃ dharmakośaṃ cintāmaṇipratiprakhyaṃ lokānām āśayasaphalīkaraṇārthaṃ tasmin kāle yugādhame śūnye buddhakṣetre parinirvṛtānāṃ tathāgatānāṃ saddharmanetrī•antardhānakālasamaye tasmin kāle tasmin samaye sarvatathāgatānāṃ mantrakośasaṃrakṣanārthaṃ tvadīyakumāramantratantrāṇāṃ kalparāje 'smin nidhānabhūto bhaviṣyati japyamāno vidhinā sārabhūto 'yaṃ mañjuśrīḥ | sarvatathāgatamantratantrāṇāṃ tvadīye ca kumārakalparāje 'grabhūto bhaviṣyaty ayam ekākṣaracakravartī | anena japyamānena sarve tāthāgatā vidyārājānaḥ japtā bhavanti || 27.2 ||

ap28.

Chapter A28

ap28.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīr aparam api tvadīyapaṭavidhānaṃ sādhanaupayikaṃ sarvakarmārthasādhakam | etenaiva tu • ekākṣareṇa hṛdayamantreṇa ṣaḍakṣareṇa5366 vā makarāntena tvadīyena mūlamantreṇa vā ṣaḍakṣarahṛdayena • oṁkārādyena • ekākṣareṇa vā paṭasyāgrataḥ • asyaiva kalpaṃ bhavati | paścime kāle paścime samaye mayi tathāgate parinirvṛte śūnye buddhakṣetre yugādhame prāpte • atrāṇe loke • aśaraṇe • aparāyaṇe idam eva kalparājā trāṇabhūtaṃ bhaviṣyati | śaraṇabhūtaṃ layanabhūtaṃ parāyaṇabhūtam | katamaṃ ca tat || 28.1 ||

ap29.

Chapter A29

ap29.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 29.1 ||

ap29.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīye kalpavidhānaparivarte saptamaṃ5397 paṭakarmavidhānaṃ yo5398 tasmin kāle tasmin samaye yugānte sādhayiṣyati5399 • amoghā tasya siddhir bhaviṣyati | saphalā sukhodayā sukhavipākā5400 dṛṣṭadharmavedanīyā sarvadurgatinivāraṇīyā5401 niyataṃ tasya bodhiparāyaṇīyā5402 siddhir bhaviṣyati || 29.2 ||

ap30.

Chapter A30

ap30.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 30.1 ||

ap30.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyamantratantre vidyārājñāṃ cakravartiprabhṛtīnāṃ sarvatathāgatoṣṇīṣapramukhānāṃ sarvamantrāṇāṃ siddhisthānāni bhavanti | tatrottarāpathe sarvatra tāthāgatīvidyārājñaḥ siddhiṃ gacchanti saṃkṣepataḥ || 30.2 ||

ap30.­3
cīne caiva mahācīne mañjughoṣaḥ sedhiṣyate5436 |
ye ca tasya mantrā vai siddhiṃ yāsyanti tatra vai || 30.3 ||
ap31.

Chapter A31

ap31.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ kumāra pūrvanirdiṣṭaṃ padaṃ sattvāviṣṭānāṃ caritaṃ śubhāśubhaṃ nimittaṃ ca vakṣye || 31.1 ||

ap31.­2

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūtaḥ • utthāyāsanād bhagavataś caraṇayor nipatya murdhnim añjaliṃ kṛtvā bhagavantam etad avocat ||

tat sādhu bhagavān vadatu sattvānāṃ parasattvadehasaṅkrāntānām ārya­divya †eti† siddha­gandharva­yakṣa­rākṣasa­piśāca­mahoraga­prabhṛtīnāṃ vicitrakarmakṛtaśarīrāṇāṃ vicitragatiniśritānāṃ vividhākārānekacihnānāṃ manuṣyāmanuṣyabhūtānāṃ cittacaritāni | samayo bhagavān samayaḥ sugataḥ | yasyedānīṃ5450 kālaṃ manyase || 31.2 ||

ap32.

Chapter A32

ap32.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 32.1 ||

ap32.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyamantrāṇāṃ sarvatantreṣu samanupraveśaṃ5477 sarvavidyārahasyam anekakālaguṇasakalaphalodayam apy anubandhanimittam | pramāṇato vakṣye siddhikāraṇāni | tadyathā || 32.2 ||

ap32.­3
janmāntaritā siddhir na siddhiḥ kālahetutaḥ |
tatpramāṇaprayogas tu pūrvasambaddham udbhavā || 32.3 ||
ap32.­4
ahitāvahito siddhir bhaved yuktivicāraṇam |
tvatkumārāśrayayuktir dṛśyate sarvadehinām || 32.4 ||
ap33.

Chapter A33

ap33.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvāvantaṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 33.1 ||

ap33.­2

tvadīye mañjuśrī kalparāje nirdeśa5487samākhyāte dharma­dhātu­kośa­tathāgata­garbha­dharma­dhātu­niṣpandānucarite mahāsūtravararatnapaṭalavisare tathāgataguhyavara-m-anujñāte mantravara5488sādhyamāne nimitta­jñāna­cihnakāla­pramāṇāntarita­sādhanaupayikāni sarvabhūtarutavitāni • asattvasattvasaṃjñānirghoṣāni bhavanti || 33.2 ||

ap34.

Chapter A34

ap34.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api taṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 34.1 ||

ap34.­2

śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ tvadīyamudrāmantraṃ5527 sarahasyaṃ paramaguhyatamam | aprakāśya-m-aśrāddhasattvatathāgataśāsane 'nabhiprasannam asamayānujñātatri­ratnavaṃśānucchedanakare • akalyāṇamitraparigṛhīte puṇyākāme5528 duṣṭajanasamparkavyatimiśrite pāpamitraparigṛhīte dūrībhūte buddhadharmāṇāṃ niṣphalībhūte kalpe 'smin nācāryānupadeśe • anabhiṣikte5529 tava kumāra paramaguhyatame maṇḍale • adṛṣṭasamaye tathāgatakule • asamante jane • aprakāśya sarvabhūtānāṃ tvanmantrānuvartināṃ || 34.2 ||

ap35.

Chapter A35

ap35.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya tathāgatamahāmudrākośasañcodanī nāma samādhiṃ samāpadyate sma | samanantarasamāpannasya bhagavataḥ śākyamune • ūrṇākośān mahāraśmir niścacāra | anekaraśmi­koṭī­nayuta­śata­sahasra­saṅkhyeya­parivārāḥ sā raśmijālā anekān buddhakṣetrān avabhāsayitvā sarvabuddhān sañcodya punar api bhagavataḥ śākyamuner ūrṇākośe 'ntarhitā || 35.1 ||

ap35.­2

samanantarasañcoditāś ca sarve buddhā bhagavanto gaganasvabhāvāṃ samādhiṃ samāpadya śuddhāvāsopari gaganatale pratyaṣṭhāt | atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvabuddhān abhyarcya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

ap36.

Chapter A36

ap36.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīḥ paramaguhyatamaṃ tvadīyaṃ mūlamudrāsameta saparivāraṃ mudrālakṣaṇaṃ sarvakarmeṣu copayojyaṃ sarvasampattidāyakaṃ saphalaṃ sarvamantrānuvartanaṃ sarvakarmārthasādhakaṃ saṃkṣepataḥ | śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ || 36.1 ||

ap36.­2

ādau tāvat prasṛtāñjalis tarjanyānāmikāmadhyaparvatānupraviṣṭā pṛthak pṛthak | sā eṣā mañjuśrīs tvadīyā mūlamudrā vikhyātā sarvakarmikā bhavati || 36.2 ||

ap37.

Chapter A37

ap37.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 37.1 ||

ap37.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīye mūlakalpe • aparam api mudrā paramaguhyatamam | sarveṣāṃ mudrātantravidhānaṃ sarvamantrāṇāṃ sammataṃ sarvamantraiś ca saha saṃyojyaṃ5619 sarvakarmaprasādhakaṃ samyaksambodhimārgaviśodhakaṃ sarvabhavamārgavināśakaṃ sarvasattvopajīvyam āyurārogyaiśvaryasarvāśāpāripūrakaṃ sarvabodhipakṣadharmaparipūrakaṃ sarvasattvasantoṣaṇakaraṃ sarva­sattva­manāśābhirucita­saphalābhikaraṇaṃ sarvakarmakaraṃ sarvamantrānuprasādhakaṃ sarvamudrāmantrasametam | śṛṇu kumāra mañjuśrīḥ || 37.2 ||

ap38.

Chapter A38

ap38.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ |

saṃkṣepato mudrāṇāṃ lakṣaṇaṃ mantrāṇāṃ ca savistaram | saṃkṣepataś ca maṇḍalānāṃ vidhiḥ samayānuvartanaṃ5670 mudrāsthānaṃ ca teṣu vai | sarahasyaṃ sarvamantrāṇāṃ sarvatantreṣu5671 maṇḍalam || 38.1 ||

ap38.­2
etat sarvaṃ purā proktaṃ sarvabuddhair maharddhikaiḥ |
mantrāṇāṃ gatimāhātmyaṃ kathitaṃ sarvakuleṣv api |
ādimadbhiḥ purābuddhaiḥ sattvānāṃ hitakāraṇāt || 38.2 ||
ap50.

Chapter A50

ap50.­1

5679atha khalu bhagavān vajrapāṇir yakṣasenāpatis tasyāṃ parṣadi sannipatito 'bhūt | sanniṣaṇṇaḥ • utthāyāsanād ekāṃśam uttarāsaṅgaṃ kṛtvā dakṣiṇaṃ jānumaṇḍalaṃ pṛthivyāṃ pratiṣṭhāpya sa yena bhagavāṃs tenāñjaliṃ praṇamya bhagavantam etad avocat || 50.1 ||

ap50.­2

yo hi bhagavan mañjuśriyā kumara­bhūtena krodharājā yamāntako nāma bhāṣitaḥ tasya kalpaṃ vistaraśo bhagavatā na prakāśitam | nāpi mañjuśriyā kumara­bhūtena | ahaṃ bhagavan paścimatā janatām avekṣya bhagavatā parinirvṛte śāsanāntardhānakālasamaye vartamāne mahābhairavakāle yugādhame sarvaśrāvakapratyeka­buddhavinirmukte buddhakṣetre tathāgataśāsanasaṃrakṣaṇārthaṃ dharmadhātucirasthityarthaṃ sarvaduṣṭarājñāṃ nivāraṇārthaṃ ratnatrayāpakāriṇāṃ nigrahārthaṃ vaineyasattvakauśalācintyabodhi­sattvacaryāparipūraṇārtham acintyasattvapāka-m-abhinirharaṇārthaṃ ca || 50.2 ||

ap51.

Chapter A51

ap51.­1

atha khalu vajrapāṇir guhyakādhipatiḥ sarvāvantaṃ mahāparṣanmaṇḍalam avalokya sarvāṃs tān śuddhāvāsopariniṣaṇṇān bhūtasaṅghān āmantrayate sma || 51.1 ||

ap51.­2

śṛṇvantu bhavanto mārṣā yamāntakasya krodharājasyāparimitabalaparākramasya durdāntadamakasya vaivasvatajīvitāntakarasya duṣṭasattvanigrahatatparasya mahābodhi­sattvasya mañjuśriyabhāṣitasya • ādau5691 tāvat paṭavidhānaṃ bhavati || 51.2 ||

ap51.­3
na tithir na ca nakṣatraṃ nopavāso vidhīyate |
arīṇāṃ bhaya5692 utpanne paṭam etaṃ likhāpayet || 51.3 ||
ap52.

Chapter A52

ap52.­1

atha khalu śāntamatir bodhisattvo mahā­sattvas tasminn eva parṣatsannipāte sannipatitaḥ sanniṣaṇṇo 'bhūt | utthāyāsanāt sarvabuddhaṃ praṇamya parṣanmaṇḍalamadhye sthitvā bhagavantaṃ śākya­muniṃ triḥ pradakṣiṇīkṛtya caraṇayor nipatya sa yena vajrapāṇir mahāyakṣasenāpatis tena vyavalokya vācam udīrayati sma || 52.1 ||

ap52.­2

atikrūras tvaṃ vajrapāṇe5790 yas tvaṃ sarvasattvānāṃ sattvopaghātikaṃ kāmopasaṃhitaṃ ca mantratantrāṃ bhāṣayase | na khalu bho jinaputra bodhisattvānāṃ mahā­sattvānām eṣa dharmaḥ | mahākaruṇāprabhāvitā hi mahābodhisattvā bodhi­sattvacārikāṃ carante | sarvasattvānām arthāya hitādhyāśayena pratipannā bhavabandhanān na mucyante || 52.2 ||

ap53.

Chapter A53

ap53.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­munis tasmāt samādher vyutthāya mahāsāgaropamāyāṃ parṣanmaṇḍalaṃ dharmaṃ deśayamānaḥ sarvasattvānāṃ sarvabhūtagaṇānām agrataḥ sanniṣaṇṇās tatra vajrapāṇipramukhānām anekabodhisattvā6072sṅkhyeyasahasrāṃ śāriputrapramukhām anekāsaṅkheyārhatsahasrāṃ vaiśravaṇapramukhām asaṅkhyeyārcacāturmahārājikadeva­putrāṃ śakrapramukhāṃ trāyastriṃśām asaṅkhyeyadeva­putrāṃ suyāmasantuṣita­nirmāṇarati­paranirmita­vaśavarti­brahmakāyika­brahmapurohita­mahābrahma­parīttābhāpramāṇābhāsvarair yāvat puṇyaprasavā bṛhatphalāvṛhā6073tapākaniṣṭhā devān āmantrayate sma || 53.1 ||

ap54.

Chapter A54

ap54.­1

atha bhagavān śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 54.1 ||

ap54.­2

ayaṃ mañjuśrīḥ • dharma­paryāyaḥ • asmin sthāne pracariṣyati tatrāhaṃ6782 svayam evaṃ veditavyaḥ | sarvabodhi­sattvagaṇaparivṛtaḥ śrāvakasaṅghapuraskṛtaḥ sarvadeva­nāgayakṣagaruḍagandharvakinnaramahoragasiddhavidyādhara6783mānuṣāmānuṣaiḥ parivṛto vihare 'haṃ veditavyaḥ | tathāgato 'tra rakṣāvaraṇaguptaye tiṣṭhatīti || 54.2 ||

ap54.­3

daśānuśaṃsā mañjuśrīḥ kumāra veditavyāḥ6784 • yatra sthāne6785 'yaṃ dharmakośas tathāgatānāṃ pustakagato vā lekhayiṣyati6786 vācayiṣyati dhārayiṣyati satkṛtya manasikṛtya vividhaiś cāmaracūrṇa6787cchatradhvaja­patākāghaṇṭābhir vādyamālyavilepanair dhūpagandhaiś ca sugandhibhiḥ pūjayiṣyati mānayiṣyati satkariṣyaty ekāgramanaso vā cittaṃ dhatse | katame daśa || 54.3 ||


ab.

Abbreviations

Abbreviations Used in the Introduction and Translation

C Choné Kangyur
D Degé Kangyur
H Lhasa Kangyur
J Lithang Kangyur
K Kangxi Kangyur
L Shelkar Kangyur
MMK Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa
N Narthang Kangyur
Skt. Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa as it is represented in the appendix
TMK Tārāmūlakalpa
Tib. Tibetan text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa as witnessed in the Pedurma Kangyur
Y Yongle Kangyur

Abbreviations Used in the Appendix‍—Sources for the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa (MMK)

Published editions
M Martin Delhey 2008
S Śāstrī 1920–25
V Vaidya 1964
Y Jayaswal 1934 (the section containing chapter 53 from Śāstrī’s edition of the MMK corrected by Rāhula Saṅkṛtyāyana)
Manuscripts
A NAK (National Archives, Kathmandu) accession no. 5/814
B NAK accession no. 3/303
MSS all manuscripts (as used for any given section of text)
R NAK accession no. 3/645
T manuscript accession no. C-2388 (Thiruvanantha­puram)
Tibetan sources
C Choné (co ne) Kangyur
D Degé (sde dge) Kangyur
H Lhasa (lha sa/zhol) Kangyur
J Lithang (li thang) Kangyur
K Kangxi (khang shi) Kangyur
N Narthang (snar thang) Kangyur
TMK Tibetan translation of the Tārāmūlakalpa (Toh 724)
Tib. Tibetan translation (supported by all recensions in the Pedurma Kangyur)
U Urga (phyi sog khu re) Kangyur
Y Yongle (g.yung lo) Kangyur
Critical apparatus
* text illegible (in a manuscript)
+ text reported as illegible in S, or in Delhey’s transcript of manuscript A
? text illegible (in a printed edition)
[] (square brackets) text hard to decipher (in a manuscript)
] right square bracket marks the lemma quoted from the root text
a.c. ante correctionem
conj. conjectured
em. emended
lac. lacunae in the text (physical damage to the manuscript)
m.c. metri causa
om. omitted
p.c. post correctionem
r recto
v verso
† (dagger) text unintelligible
• (middle dot) lack of sandhi or partial sandhi

n.

Notes

n.­1
Not to be confused with the division of the Buddhist canon of the same name.
n.­2
Cf. Wallis 2002, pp. 9–10. The canonical Chinese translation, done in at least two stages, dates to the 11th century (ib., p. 10).
n.­3
Jean Przyluski (Przyluski 1923, p. 301) wrote, “C’est une sorte d’encyclopédie qui traite, sous forme de sermons, des sujets les plus variés: iconographie, rituel, astrologie, etc…”
n.­4
In the MMK as a whole, there are more than 1,600 proper names, excluding place names.
n.­5
The accumulations are mentioned, e.g., in the passage: “There is, in the extensive manual of rites of Bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, an ocean-like chapter on useful practices whereby beings who have undertaken the complete practice of the mantra system [can perfect] the accumulations [required for the attainment of] awakening” (asti mañjuśriyaḥ kumārabhūtasya bodhisattvasya mahāsattvasya kalpavisare samudrā­paṭala­sādhanopayikaṃ sarvamantra­tantra­caryānupraviṣṭānāṃ sattvānāṃ bodhisambhārakāraṇam). The chapter that this quotation is taken from is not included in our translation, but is appended to chapter 36 in Śāstrī’s edition (Śāstrī 1920-25, vol. 2, p. 384, lines 8–10).
n.­6
Comment left by Harunaga Isaacson at http://tibetica.blogspot.com/2008/11/in-window-of-sweet-shop.html.
n.­7
The number 55 is arbitrary inasmuch as this count includes only one of the two chapters, each specified in its colophon in the Trivendrum manuscript as “the thirty-fourth.” These two chapters are placed together in Śāstrī’s edition where they form chapter 36. Only the first of them is included in our translation. Also, another couple of chapters seem to have been created artificially, such as, e.g., “chapter” 55, appended in Śāstrī’s edition after the final chapter 54, where it clearly does not belong.
n.­8
Two sets of folio references have been included in this translation due to a discrepancy in volume 88 (rgyud ’bum, na) of the Degé Kangyur between the 1737 par phud printings and the late (post par phud) printings. In the latter case, an extra work, Bodhi­maṇḍasyālaṃkāra­lakṣa­dhāraṇī (Toh 508, byang chub snying po’i rgyan ’bum gyi gzungs), was added as the second text in the volume, thereby displacing the pagination of all the following texts in the same volume by 17 folios. Since the eKangyur follows the later printing, both references have been provided, with the highlighted one linking to the eKangyur viewer.
n.­9
byang chub sems dpa’ ’dus pa’i ’khor gyi tshogs Tib. The word “pavilion” is missing from the Tibetan. The Sanskrit word maṇḍala, taken here to describe “pavilion” (cf. Edgerton 1970, maṇḍalamāḍa, p. 416), is translated in the Tibetan as tshogs (“assembly”) and refers to the “congregation of bodhisattvas.”
n.­528
Om. Tib.
n.­529
“It also brings complete omniscience” om. Tib.
n.­604
shin tu bkrus pa D. The phrase “Tightly woven, thoroughly clean” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. has in this position “keeping the vow well.”
n.­605
kha tshar dang bcas pa dang / Tib. The phrase “fringe tassels” in the Tibetan or “fringe” (sadaśa) in the Skt. probably refers to the threads extending beyond the rectangle of the woven cloth on each of the four sides.
n.­611
rab tu gsang ba Y, K, N, H; rab tu gsungs pa D. Y, K, N, and H agree with the Sanskrit ºrahasya.
n.­612
khyod kyi N, H; khyod kyis D; N and H indicate that the “cloth-painting procedure” pertains specifically to Mañjuśrī.
n.­613
“Smallest” om. Tib.
n.­623
phung po lhag ma dang bcas pa’i mya ngan las ’das pa’i grong khyer du ’gro bar byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “that takes [them] to the citadel of nirvāṇa in which the aggregates remain.”
n.­624
byang chub sems dpa’ rnams kyi rgyud nges par byang chub sgrub par byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “that continuously causes them to always accomplish the awakening of all bodhisattvas.”
n.­625
bdag gi gsang sngags ’di Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This secret mantra of mine.”
n.­664
’jam dpal gzhon nu gang khyod kyis bstan pa’i sems can de dag gi phyir/ le’u’i cho ga rab ’byam ’di thabs sla bas ’grub par ’gyur ba ngas kyang bstan te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, I have taught the extensive chapter on the rite, a method that is easy to master, for the sake of those beings whom you foretold.”
n.­665
“I will speak for the benefit of all beings” om. Tib.
n.­717
klu rnams mthong ba yang don yod pa yin te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “this is effective in making the nāgas appear.”
n.­956
“Mantras” om. Tib.
n.­1021
The translation of this paragraph is partially based on the Tibetan and partially based on the Skt.
n.­1123
“Time” om. Tib.
n.­1124
“You act” (pratipannaḥ) om. Tib.
n.­1125
“Crossroad” om. Tib.
n.­1126
It is not clear very clear what this size or distance refers to. Perhaps this could also be the safe distance between the fire and the painting.
n.­1127
de nas yang sbyin sreg gi mthar pad+ma’i me tog tsan+dana dkar po’i chus bsang gtor byas pa stong rtsa brgyad sbyin sreg bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, at the end of this fire offering, one should perform one thousand and eight fire offerings that cast smoke using water containing lotus flowers and white sandalwood.”
n.­1128
sbyin sreg gi mthar yang bzang po’i gdan dang gdong bkab la rang gi lha la rang gi sngags kyis spyan drang bar bya zhing / D. The Tibetan translates as, “At the end of the homa, one should use mantra to invite one’s personal deity onto an excellent cushioned seat.”
n.­1129
Skt.: oṁ kumāra­rūpiṇa darśaya darśaya • ātmano bhūti­samudbhāvāya svapnaṃ me niveda yathābhūtam | hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
n.­1130
As the following sentence indicates, this could still be during the first watch.
n.­1131
nor bu zhel gyi khang pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “jeweled crystal houses.”
n.­1132
a mra’i shing tshogs rab mang po/ D. The Tibetan includes this line that is not attested in the Skt. following Skt. 15.9b. It translates as, “Or a great many groves of mango trees.”
n.­1133
gang du bdag gi lus gnas pa/ /de nyid du ni mthong bar byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It will bring about a vision / Of the state that one’s body is in.” The Skt. of this half-stanza appears to be corrupt.
n.­1134
gru dang chu ni ’thung ba dang / /btung ba’i khang pa khang pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Boats and water, / Taverns and houses.”
n.­1135
ban glang dag D; ba glang dag Y, K, C. The Tibetan translation ban glang in D translates the Sanskrit term *nāgī, which can mean “belonging to an elephant.” The Tibetan translation ba glang in Y, K, and C translates as “cow” or “bull.”
n.­1136
lan tshwa la sogs reg pa ni/ /kun tu gsal te mthong ba ni/ N, H; lan tshwa la sogs reg pa ni/ /kun du gal te mthong ba ni/ D. The Tibetan translation in N and H seems preferable to D, and translates as, “If one touches salt and the like / And sees light all around.” Here the Tibetan appears to have translated the Skt. lavaṇa using its alternate meaning, “lustre.”
n.­1137
snum khur rnam pa du ma ni/ /bza’ dang spyad par rjes ’dod dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Many different types of fried cakes, / That one is allowed to eat and enjoy.”
n.­1138
rnam pa sna tshogs bza’ la spyod/ /mthong na bad kan can du brjod/ Tib. The Tibetan corresponding to Skt. 15.23cd translates as, “If one consumes or sees these various types / Of food, it is an indication of having phlegm.” The Tibetan bad gan can might also be translated as “having a phlegm disorder.”
n.­1139
rmi lam ma lus du ma ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “All the various kinds of dreams.”
n.­1140
sna tshogs rin chen mthong ba dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or a variety of jewels may be seen.”
n.­1141
ri dang phyogs ni rab ’bar ba/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or mountains and the directions ablaze.”
n.­1142
“Debilitated” (sammūrchita) om. Tib.
n.­1143
gzhan yang rin chen gang yin pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or some other kind of jewel.”
n.­1144
me dang tsha ba sten pa dang / /reg dang za bar byed pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one makes use of, touches, or / Ingests hot and spicy [foods].”
n.­1145
shing chen de bzhin theg pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A great tree, or a vehicle,” reflecting the Sanskrit *mahānaga instead of the extant Skt. mahānāga.
n.­1146
de bzhin rnam pa sna tshogs pa/ /gang gzhan rmi lam dag tu brjod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Various types of things such as these / And others are expressed in dreams.”
n.­1147
The Tibetan seems to indicate that the things listed here and later in this section are experienced in one’s dreams, rather then done while awake. The Skt., however, is vague and could be interpreted either way. This ambiguity could be intentional, as the activities listed here, if dreamed of, could be caused by the humor of wind, or, if they done during the waking state, could increase this humor because of their nature.
n.­1148
gtsor yang rlung ni yang dag ’byung/ /shing thog rlung ni rab bskyed pa/ D. The meaning of Skt. 15.44cd is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “Primarily [anything] produced by wind / [Such as] fruit brought forth by wind.”
n.­1149
dngos rnams rlung ni skyed pa yi/ /bza’ dang bca’ ba khyad par ldan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “These things are the particular types/ Of food and drink that produce wind.”
n.­1150
’byung po rnams ni gar byed dang / /bdag nyid kyang ni gar byed pa/ /gang gis rmi lam mthong na ni/ /de ’dra rlung nad can du shes/ Tib. The Tibetan that corresponds to Skt. 15.46cd and 15.47ab translates as, “If in a dream one sees / A number of beings dancing, / Or even oneself dancing, / Know that one has a wind disorder.”
n.­1151
mi bzad gzugs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “hideous forms” in place of “harsh expressions.”
n.­1152
grong gi chos ni mthong ba las/ /rmi lam chags pas sa bon byung/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Attachment in a dream sows the seed / For having a vision of a sexual act.”
n.­1153
rnam ’dres rnam par ’dres pa ni/ /rmi lam na ni rtag tu mthong / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mixed [humors] produce mixed [effects]; / This will always be seen in dreams.”
n.­1154
Possibly, the Skt. sattva should be emended to tattva (“reality,” “truth”), as the meaning would then be that dreams are “devoid of reality,” which would tie in better with the next half-stanza which mentions “those who show reality (tattva­darśibhiḥ).”
n.­1155
de bas rnam pa thams cad kyis/ /rmi lam zhes bya yod pa spangs/ /bya ba dus kyi rim pa nyid/ /de nyid gzigs pas bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Since what is called a dream, / Is based on mental images, it is devoid of existence. / The sequence of activities and lifespans / Were taught by those who see the truth.”
n.­1156
yid ni gzhungs pa Tib. The reading “are intelligent” is adopted from the Tibetan. The Skt. has durmedhā which translates as, “not intelligent.”
n.­1157
btung ba mang la rtag tu dga’/ Tib. The Skt. could also be translated as “always delight in receiving respect.” The Tibetan translates as, “And always enjoy much drinking,” reflecting the Sanskrit *bahupānā° instead of the extant Skt. bahumānā°. Either reading seems equally plausible.
n.­1158
rgyal rigs su ni bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Those who are said to be born in the warrior caste.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *kṣatriye jāti­nirdiṣṭaḥ instead of the extant Skt. nakṣatre jāti­nirdiṣṭaḥ.
n.­1159
ser sna ldan zhing mtshon pa med/ Tib. The Skt. of this pāda has been translated to correspond in meaning to the Tibetan.
n.­1160
longs spyod chen po skye ’gyur zhing / /rang gi las kyis nye bar ’tshe/ /rang gi las ’bras bstan pa ni/ /las kyi sngags ni spang ba min/ /las min sngags ni gtso bo zhes/ /’jig rten ’dren pas gsungs pa yin/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to Skt. 15.57 translates as, “Some are born into great prosperity and / Some make their living by their own activity. / It is said that the results of their actions / Are not independent of ritual mantras, / But as the guides of the world have said, / ‘Mantra is best, not ritual.’ ” The translation of the last four lines of Skt. 15.57c–f is largely a guess.
n.­1161
de bas sems can bad kan can/ /sa steng grub pa byed pa ni/ /sa bdag ’dod pa byed pa la/ /de la grub pa thob par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus beings of the phlegm type / Who reach accomplishment upon the earth / Will, if they form the desire to be a lord of the earth, / Attain that very accomplishment.”
n.­1162
The Skt. phrase śūradveṣī ca (or śūra dveṣī ca) could also be translated as “heroic and hateful.”
n.­1163
spros chen brten dang blon po dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A very powerful and steadfast minister.” The Tibetan translation of the Skt. compound dṛḍhamantrī translates the Skt. mantrin according to the classical meaning of the term in the Sanskrit epic literature (and elsewhere) as a king’s minister.
n.­1164
shes bzhin las kyis nyer spyod pa’i/ /sems can zil gyis mnan nas spyod/ D. The first line of the Tibetan, which corresponds to Skt. 15.66b, should be emended to read de bzhin instead of shes bzhin. The first half-stanza will then read, “Acting in accordance with this mode, / He engages beings by assualting them.”
n.­1165
thub pas spangs pa’i don/ Tib. The translation “rejected,” which seems to be supported by the Tibetan, is based on reading the Skt. ūrjita as an irregular past passive participle of √vṛj.
n.­1166
cho ga sbyar ba’i chos rnams gang / /sngags pas thams cad rab sbyar na/ /spyod pa des ni ’grub ’gyur te/ /gzhan las sems can de la min/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If a mantrin should employ / Any system that uses rituals / That activity will be successful, / Which is not the case for other individuals.”
n.­1167
sngo bsangs Tib. Śyāma (“dark”) is translated into the Tib. as “greenish blue.”
n.­1168
dpa’ dang de bzhin drag pa dang / /chags ldan sdig pa’i khyim las skyes/ N, H; dpa’ dang de bzhin drag po dang / /chags ldan sdig pa’i khyim las skyes/ Y, K; dpa’ dang de bzhin drag pa dang / /’dab chags sdig pa’i khyim las skyes/ D. The recensions of the Tibetan translation in N, H, Y, and K correspond to the Sanskrit text and are preferable to the variant ’dab chags found in D.
n.­1169
de dag gang phyir nad mang ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And for that reason is often ill.”
n.­1170
sems can rlung nad ’khrug pa la/ /gti mug nye bar zhi ba dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Beings who are agitated by a wind disorder, / Who are dull and tranquil.”
n.­1171
The Skt. can also be translated as “And can be controlled with stupefying mantras.”
n.­1172
rgyu skar khyim ni chu skyes dang / /gza’ ni bdag po spen par blta/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to Skt. 15.81cd translates as, “They should ascertain the asterisms of the water signs / And of Saturn as the governing planet.” There is no mention of Saturn, however, in the Skt., and it is also not clear whether this statement refers to what has been said above or what will be said below.
n.­1173
This probably refers to the activities of pacifying (śāntika) and enriching (pauṣṭika).
n.­1174
rlung nad skyes pa’i sems can ni/ D. The Skt. doesn’t specify whether it is the performer or the target for whom these activities/rites are contra-indicated. Possibly both are meant at the same time, but the Tibetan suggests the former. It omits “and confused,” and only says “Beings born with wind disorders.”
n.­1175
las las gol ba med par ni/ lus can yon tan mi smin te/ /yon tan kho na las ldan pas/ /skye bar yang ni byed pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translation of this verse is obscure. One possible translation of the Tibetan is, “A living being does not develop qualities / They don’t possess that contradict their karma. / It is only the qualities and karma one possesses / That affect the next rebirth. ”
n.­1176
zlos pa sems can yon tan shes/ /yon tan yon tan min las ’ching / D. The Tibetan translates as, “A mantra reciter knows the qualities of beings. / Good qualities and faults are bound by karma.”
n.­1177
yon tan med la bya min gang / /de yi las ni bya ba min/ /gang phyir bya ba las byed de/ /bya ba yon tan med ma yin/ D. The Tibetan is obscure. One possible translation of the Tibetan is, “In the absence of qualities, that which is not a ritual / Has no karma‍—it is not a ritual; / Because a ritual creates karma, / There is no ritual that lacks qualities.”
n.­1178
bya ba las dang yon tan nyid/ /yang dag ldan pa sgrub par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One who has the right ritual, karma, / And qualities will be successful.”
n.­1179
rdzas dang sems can spyod pa gzhan/ /bya ba las dang yon tan yin/ Tib. The Tibetan is obscure. One possible translation of the Tibetan is, “Other substances and the other behaviors of beings / Are rituals, karma, and qualities.”
n.­1180
Vighna can mean an obstacle as well as the demon that creates it.
n.­1181
drag cing ma rungs las rnams ni/ /rmi lam rtag tu ’phral du smin/ D. It is not completely clear whether this is about the “activites that are violent and cruel,” or dreams about such activities.
n.­1182
’jig rten ’jig rten ’das rnams kyi/ /yon tan skye bar yang dag ’byung / N, H; ’jig rten ’jig rten ’das rnams kyis/ /yon tan skye bar yang dag ’byung / D. The meaning of Skt. 15.96cd is unclear. The Tibetan is also obscure. One possible translation for the Tibetan in N and H is, “Worldly and transcendent / Qualities arise at birth.”
n.­1183
drag po’i gzugs ni gzugs chen po/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He has a fierce form and tremendous size.”
n.­1184
dus mtsha Tib. The Skt. kālarātra can be understood literally (“black as night”), or taken as a proper name (Kālarātra), or perhaps interpreted as “the husband of Kālarātrī.” The Tibetan supports the second option.
n.­1185
mi bzad sngags ni bshad par bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “I will now explain the fierce mantra.”
n.­1186
cho ’phrul chen po bgegs rnams kun/ /ma rungs sems can ’jig par byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It destroys all powerful sorcery and obstructing beings, / And all wicked beings.”
n.­1187
he he mahā­krodha ṣaṇ­mukha ṣaṭ­caraṇa sarva­vighna­ghātaka hūṁ hūṁ | kiṃ cirāyasi vināyaka­jīvitāntakara duḥ­svapnaṃ me nāśaya laṅgha laṅgha [D. la hu la hu] samayam anusmara phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
n.­1188
In line with the teachings of this tantra, the mantra is not differentiated from the deity.
n.­1189
’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa thams cad kyi sngags rnams ’don par byed pa na gang zhig ma rungs pa’i sems can gyi gzugs can gyis rnam par ’tshe bar byed pa de la/ khro bo’i rgyal po ’dis ni rigs rgyud thams cad ’dul bar byed cing / srog kyang ’dzin par mi byed de/ D. The Tibetan seem confused: “When any worldly or transcendent mantra is recited, / This Lord of Wrath will tame the one who makes the embodied form of a wicked being cause problems and the entire class of beings, / But he will not take their lives.”
n.­1190
In the Tibetan this is the last line of the prose section. The verse section begins with “Having spoken thus.”
n.­1191
zlos pas rtag tu ’di dag ni/ /mtshan mo rtag tu don byas na/ Y, K; zlos pas rtag tu ’di dag ni/ /mtshan mo rtag tu don byas na/ N, H; zlos pas rtag tu gdon byas na/ D. D appears to skip some material corresponding to Skt. 15.110cd and combines these two lines into a single line that translates as, “If a reciter recites it consistently.” The Tibetan recensions in N, H, Y, and K track closely with the Skt.
n.­1192
’dod pa chung zhing cung zad dge/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who has little desire and a little virtue.”
n.­1193
phra ba’i gos la rtag tu dga’/ Tib. “Fine” has been supplied from the Tibetan, filling the lacunae in the Skt.
n.­1194
zas tshod rig dag rtag gtsang ldan/ Tib. The Skt. of this pāda is unclear; the Tibetan, which translates the term śucinaḥ (gtsang ldan) in Skt. 15.118c in this line, translates as, “Knows proper portions and is always clean.”
n.­1195
“Guests” om. Tib.
n.­1196
gtsang ba’i spyod pas mngon par ’gro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Has sex with one whose conduct is pure.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *śucicārābhigāminaḥ instead of the extant Skt. śucidārābhigāminaḥ.
n.­1197
sku ni Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “body” in place of “hair.”
n.­1198
de tshe ’jig rten ’das pa grub/ /de la ’bras bcas grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then they will attain the transcendent/ Accomplishment together with the result.”
n.­1199
longs spyod che zhing sngags rnams shes/ /sngags rnams kun la de nyid rig/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who is endowed with good fortune, is skilled in mantra/ And understands all mantras.”
n.­1200
bud med ming ldan Y, N, H; bud med mig ldan D. “Has a woman’s name” (based on emended Skt.) is supported by Y, N, and H. D translate as, “Has the eyes of a woman.”
n.­1201
The Tibetan translates as, “worships gods.”
n.­1202
thul bar dka’ Tib. “Difficult to subdue” is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. reading suggests “difficult/dangerous to approach.”
n.­1203
byin par phra/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “is slight in his giving.”
n.­1204
rgyal ba la ni srog kyang gtong / Tib. The translation of the last pāda is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “He is the sun among the victorious lords.”
n.­1205
I.e., the kṣatriya caste.
n.­1206
ma rungs rtag tu bab col byed/ D. “Cruel and rash” doesn’t seem to fit the context, but the Tibetan supports this reading.
n.­1207
Spiny bitter gourd (Momordica monadelpha).
n.­1208
Skt. 15.140d om. Tib.
n.­1209
mgrin pa bum pa ’dra ba dang / D. “Resembling a conch” probably implies that the neck has three lines indicative of good fortune. The Tibetan translates as, “resembling a vase,” reflecting the Sanskrit *kumbha° instead of the extant Skt. kambu°.
n.­1210
thal gong rgyas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Broad, elegant back.”
n.­1211
kun nas dkar med ba spu dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “No gray body hair anywhere.”
n.­1212
“Hips” om. Tib.
n.­1213
nyams med Tib. The Skt. kharta, which could not be identified, is translated into the Tibetan as “blemish.”
n.­1214
sor mo rnams kyi ring ba dang /. The Tibetan translates as, “With toes that are long, and.”
n.­1215
nang stong ma yin mthil mnyam gnas/ Tib. This pāda is unintelligible in the extant Skt. The Tibetan is also obscure.
n.­1216
It is not certain whether the reading here is “ears” (which could only be obtained after emending varṇau (or arṇau) to karṇau, or some other body part that forms a pair, to account for the dual ending. The Tib. is of no help.
n.­1217
In the Tib., “nice to behold” and the entire next verse constitute the description of the person and not of the pair of body parts just mentioned. The Skt., however, consistently uses the dual ending, clearly indicating that a pair is meant.
n.­1218
’jam Tib. “Smooth” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “not clinging.”
n.­1219
ri mo zab cing D. The Tibetan translates as, “a deep line.”
n.­1220
mchig pa rab sngags shin tu chud/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Whose fine testicles are withdrawn.” The Tibetan shin tu chud may be a scribal error for shin tu chung, which would match the extant Skt. svalpatarau.
n.­1221
gang tshe skyes dbang gtsang ba dang / /rtse mo dmar la yang dag gnas/ Tib. This half-stanza, again, is not very clear. The Tibetan translates as “Whose penis is clean / And has a red tip.”
n.­1222
“During sleep” could euphemistically refer to going to bed for sex.
n.­1223
mang po ma yin snum pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Not abundant and smooth.”
n.­1224
It is not clear what period of time is meant, but it is most likely one day.
n.­1225
lan gsum bshang zhing sngags drug dran/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One who defecates three times and recalls the mantra six,” or, alteratively, “One who defecates three times and recalls the six-syllable mantra.” The Tibetan may reflect the Sanskrit *ṣaṇmantrī instead of the extant Skt. ṣaṇmūtrī.
n.­1226
Neither the Skt. nor the Tib. specifies which watch of the night this is meant to be.
n.­1227
de yi grub pa rtag tu mchog /las kun byed par snang ba yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They will manifest the best accomplishment / That performs all the activities.”
n.­1228
’bras bu rnam pa sna tshogs dang / /phun tshogs rnam pa mang po la/ /mi rnams rjes su ’dod pa yang / /mtshan nyid kyis ni mngon mtshan pa’o/ D. ’bras bu rnam pa sna tshogs dang / /phun tshogs rnam pa mang po la/ /mi rnams rjes su ’dod pa yang / /mtshan nyid kyis ni sngon mtshan pa’o/ Y, K, N. The Tibetan that corresponds to Skt. 15.152a–d translates as, “People who pursue / Various types of results / And various kinds of good conditions / Are marked with signs.” The variant sngon mtshan or “previous marks” in Y, K, and N reflects the Sanskrit *pūrvalakṣitaḥ in place of the extant Skt. abhilaḳsitaḥ, which might translate as “Have been previously indicated by marks.”
n.­1229
nus pa’i gza’ rnams kyis mtshan pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Are marked by these planets that indicate capability.”
n.­1230
nyi ma’i dkyil ’khor mchar kha ni/ /tho rangs dus su gang skyes dang / /gang tshe de yi dus su skyes/ /de la grub po rab tu snang / D. Skt. 15.153ef is expanded into four lines in the Tibetan that contain additional material and translate as, “If they are born at dawn/ When the sun is rising, / The time at which they are born/ Will manifest accomplishment for them.” Only the first and second verses in this set of four in the Tibetan correspond to Skt. 15.153ef.
n.­1231
In the Buddhist and Hindu astrology, the moon and the sun are regarded as “planets” (graha).
n.­1232
lus can rnams kyi rtag de la/ /ma rungs gza’ mthong gang yin pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “For such beings it is always the case / That inauspicious planets are seen.”
n.­1233
las ni ngan ’joms skar mda’ can/ D; The Tibetan translates as, “Meteors that destroy negative karma,” while the Narthang and Peking read “Meteors that destroy karma.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *karma­nirghātolkinaḥ instead of the extant Skt. kampa­nirghāta•ulkinaḥ.
n.­1234
“Looks at” is a technical expression indicating that the astrological aspect of the planet that “looks” is exercising influence on the planet it looks at, and, indirectly, on the affected person.
n.­1235
One yoke (or four cubits), as an astronomical distance between celestial objects, is the radial distance of eight degrees (if the Indian astronomical measures of cubit and yoke corresponded to those used in ancient Babylon).
n.­1236
phur bus sa de mthong bar ’gyur/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is partly based on the Tibetan. The Skt. could also be read as “Jupiter is looked at.”
n.­1237
de bzhin nyin phyed nyi ma ni/ /nyi ma phyed du mnyam par mthong / Tib. The Skt. of this half-stanza is not clear, as it could be translated in more than one way. The Tibetan could be translated as “Likewise when the sun is at midday / [Accomplishments?] equal to the sun manifest.”
n.­1238
Ketu is here the descending node of the moon. Like Rāhu, it is an imaginary planet that takes 18.6 years to complete one revolution. It is however not clear whether Ketu and Rāhu mantioned in this verse refer to the nodes of the moon, as the Rāhu two lines below seems to refer to an ordinary eclipse.
n.­1239
thung ’gyur nyi ma gnya’ shing tsam/ /byed pa nyid du bstan pa ni/ D. This sentence is incomprehensible in both the Skt. and the Tibetan. The Tibetan might translate as, “For a short moment it is a yoke’s distance from the sun. / When this happens, it is said.”
n.­1240
The translation of this pāda is a guess. The Skt. yugāntaka could be translated as “noon,” but also as “the end of the eon.”
n.­1241
sgra gcan spen pa nyid dag yin/ /mun pa dus dang dus mthar byed/ /de nas phar ni thung ba na/ /’chi ltas skar mda’ sa ’gul byed/ D. The last four lines in the Tibetan for this obscure verse translate as, “This is Rāhu and Saturn. / At the time of darkness, when the end times have come, / If seen far in the distance / Meteors, omens of death, cause earthquakes.”
n.­1242
nyi ma nub kar zangs ma’ mdog Tib. In the Tibetan, it seems that it is the one who is governed by this planetary influence that is “the color of the setting sun, with a strong tint of vermillion.”
n.­1243
The “chief planet,” i.e. the sun, since the sun, in Indic astrology, is referred to be the generic name of a planet.
n.­1244
dbul zhing nad btab glen pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Poor, prone to illness, and dull.”
n.­1245
’gul byed sgra drag dmar ba’i mdog /mnam lcags nyid kyang rab rdung byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “When the earth shakes, there are terrifying noises, and [all] is the color red, / Meteors strike,”
n.­1246
de bzhin rdo rje mchi ltas dang / /gzhan yang khyim sogs rab tu mthong / /skye bo kun kyis sgra gcan ni/ /mi bzad rab tu mthong gyur na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When there is ominous lightning / And the Pleiades and the like are visible, / When all beings behold / The terrifying Rāhu.”
n.­1247
dbul zhing mgon med tshul khrims ’chal/ /mi ni rtag tu sdig pa spyod/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “People who are poor and vulnerable, / Who lack discipline and always engage in evil acts.”
n.­1248
bud med mtshan ni ngan pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Women are ugly.”
n.­1249
de ltar skyes gyur skyes pa dang / /’jig rten mang po skye ba yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus they take birth again and again, / Born into many different worlds.”
n.­1250
lo ni kun la ’dod pa’ang zhes/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Every year, whatever is desired,” reflecting the Sanskrit *sarvasaṃvat instead of the extant Skt. sarvasampat.
n.­1251
de nyid ’jig rten gnas pa yin/ Tib. The translation of this pāda is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “The mantra, singularly, always,” and is difficult to makes sense of in the context.
n.­1252
The fourth pāda appears to be missing in the Skt. and the Tib.
n.­1253
gza’ rnams las la spyod pa zhes/ /des na ’di ni mthong zhes gsungs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It is said the planets are inciters of karma, / And that one can thus observe them.”
n.­1254
In the Skt., this verse includes two additional lines (one of them with lacunae) between the two half-stanzas. They have been omitted in the translation here, as they don’t seem to add anything in terms of content.
n.­1255
de nas gzhan yang rab bshad pa/ /nges par zlos pas rtag tu bya/ /yud tsam dag ni bcu gnyis dang / /dus dang dus min ’gro ba’i rgyu/ /grub pa’i rgyu ’am ma yin pa/ /’gro ba min pa’ang bshad par bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Next I will explain / How a mantra reciter can always act with certainty. / I will explain the cause in terms of / The twelve moments and proper and improper times, / And what is neither a cause/ Of accomplishment nor progress.” The final line of the Tibetan term ’gro ba min pa reflects the Sanskrit *ayātaṃ instead of the extant Skt. apātraṃ.
n.­1256
lo legs Tib. “There are bountiful harvests” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
n.­1257
nyi ma gsal mthong dge/ Tib. In place of “kings enjoy prosperity,” the Tibetan translates as, “the sun shines bright, and there is goodness.”
n.­1258
dus dang de bzhin dbang po’i gzhu/ /skye bo rnams la rtag zhi byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “At times when there is rainbow/ It always brings peace to all beings.”
n.­1259
sha za dang ni ma mo dang / /drag po ma rungs nyer ’joms byed/ /sha za rnams kyi spyod pa ni/ /de bzhin ma rungs sems can brjod/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Now I will describe the wicked ways / And behaviors of flesh eaters / Such as the kravyādas and mātṛs / Who are fierce, wicked, and bring harm.” The Tibetan sha za rnams kyi spyod pa may reflect the Sanskrit *ācaritaṃ piśācānām instead of the extant Skt. caritaṃ piśitāśinām. The Tibetan sha za appears in the first verse as a translation of kravyāda, so in this second instance it has been translated literally as “flesh eater” and not as piśāca.
n.­1260
gzhan gyi sdug bsngal dag la sems/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who consider the suffering of others.”
n.­1261
sngags dang rig pa rnams kyis drangs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Can summon using this mantra and vidyā.” It is however not clear which mantra is meant. It could be the vidyārāja One Syllable taught in the previous chapter (14.5).
n.­1262
gang du mtshan nyid la brten pas/ /spyod pa rgya cher bstan pa yin/ /gzhan gyi lus la gnas nas ni/ /mi lus brten nas gnas pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When the indicated target is possessed, / They display a vast number of behaviors. / They inhabit the bodies of others, / Possess the person’s body, and then remain.”
n.­1263
“Gods and asuras” (surāsura), with its alliteration and the sense derived from the grammar that they represent two opposing parties, is a Skt. stock phrase that has no equivalent in English.
n.­1264
lha ni mchod pa zhes bshed de/ /lha min nga rgyal can gyi rgyus/ /gnas der gnas pa’ang rnam pa gnyis/ /rim bzhin lha dang lha ma yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The gods are said to be venerable. / The asuras are rooted in pride. / They reside in their two places, / Known respectively as gods and asuras.”
n.­1265
de yang der ni rnam gnyis te/ /drag pa dang ni thun mong yin/ /de yang der ni rnam gnyis ’gro/ dge dang mi dge ’gro ba lnga/ Tib. It is not clear how “the five destinies” fits in into this division, as the Skt. is rather vague. The Tibetan translates as, “They each are of two further types: / Those that are cruel and those that are ordinary. / Those fall into two further types: / The virtuous and nonvirtuous among the five destinies.”
n.­1266
der gnas rnam gsum ’gro ba ste/ /nyi shu cu grangs med pa’o/ /lha dbang dang ni ’og min par/ /go rims ji bzhin sa med pa’o/ D. This verse is very unclear and could be translated a number of different ways. It is, however, for the most part supported by the Tibetan apart from the last pāda, which translates as, “Such is the sequence of the non-terrestrial.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *yathā­saṅkhyam abhūmakāḥ instead of the extant Skt. yāmā­saṅkhyam­abhūpakāḥ.
n.­1267
This line is omitted in the Tib. The preceding line, “All the noble buddhas,” begins the next verse.
n.­1268
sngags dang rgyud ni rig bcas pas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “By the mantras and tantras together with the vidyā.”
n.­1269
bag yod rigs ni bzang ba dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Who are careful and of good character.”
n.­1270
mi rnams kyi ni mdor bsdu na/ /de dag gi ni lus bzung nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “In brief, human beings / Should maintain their bodies, and.”
n.­1271
rtag tu shin tu chos don dang / /thar pa’i don du rnam par brtag D. The Tibetan translates as, “Always orient themselves toward liberation / And toward the highest Dharma.”
n.­1272
In this passage the terms sattva (sems can) and asattva (sems can ma yin) are medical terms. Sattva refers to the psycho-physical state of purity, balance, and health, and asattva refers to its opposite. This important terminology would be missed if one were to translate the Tibetan sems can and sems can ma yin according to the meaning these terms so often bear outside of the medical literature as “a being” and “not a being.”
n.­1273
gang gzhan rnam pa sna tshogs byas/ Tib. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
n.­1274
Part of this pāda is missing in the Skt. The Tibetan however, doesn’t indicate any missing content.
n.­1275
This passage is not clear, but it is possibly saying that earth and water are asattva elements, and the remaining two or three are sattva. They are associated with nonhuman and human beings respectively.
n.­1276
rgyud ’di yongs su bshad pa yin/ Tib. In place of “sūtra,” the Tibetan translates as, “tantra.” While both are correct, the former accords with the chapter colophons that refer to the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa as a vaipulyasūtra.
n.­1277
de nyid chos ni btsal bya’i phyir/ /rgyud ’di yongs su bshad pa yin/ /rgyud dang sngags dang sman bzang po/ /bka’ ni yang dag gsungs pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It has been taught in this tantra / For those who might seek that teaching. / This scripture perfectly explains / The tantra, mantra, and good medicine.”
n.­1278
nad med Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “no illness.”
n.­1279
gang ’di bstan pa dag la ni/ /sngags kun ’don par byed pa na/ /kun mkhyen shes dang shes bya yi/ /las kyi rgyud ni ’brel pa dang / /sngags zlos pa yi ched du ni/ /rgyud rnams mtha’ dag sa steng gsungs/ /sngags rgyud ma lus don dag ni/ /byang chub rnam gsum gzhol ba ste/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to Skt. 15.218–219 arranges the lines of these verses in a different order. The Tibetan for these two verses reads, “If all the mantras are recited / That are [found] in these teachings, / One connects with the karmic causes / For omniscience of what is knowable. // That which is contained within the mantras to be recited / Has been taught, on earth, in all the tantras; / The entire meaning of tantra and mantra / Is directed toward the three aspects of awakening.”
n.­1280
gzhan la cho ga rab snang ba/ /cho ga’i rgyal po ’di la’ang yod/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “That which is found in other manuals / Is also found in this king of manuals.”
n.­1281
gang du cho ga’i rgyal po ’dis/ /dbang ’gyur min dang bkug min pa/ /sa steng rten gsum ’di na/ /rig pa’i sngags rgyal de yod min/ D. The Tibetan adds content to this verse in its last line and translates as, “There is no king of vidyāmantras / On earth or in this threefold world / That is not controlled or attracted / By this king of ritual manuals.” The Tibetan translators seem to have read *vidyārājaḥ (“king of vidyā mantras”) in place of a four-letter lacunae in the Skt. This reading is metrically impossible. The reading conjectured here is vidyate (“exists”), which fits the meter.
n.­1282
sangs rgyas kun gyi gsung dag ni/ /rtag tu dge ba don yod ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This teaching of all the buddhas / Is always virtuous and productive,” reflecting the Sanskrit *sarva­buddhānāṃ instead of the extant Skt. sarvabhūtānāṃ.
n.­1283
sngags rnams kun la sngags pa ni/ /bzlas dang sbyin sreg rtag dad pa’o/ Y, L, K, C; sngags rnams kun la sngags pa ni/ /bzlas dang sbyin sreg rtag ’dod pa’o/ D. The Tibetan in Y, L, K, and C is closer to the extant Skt. and translates as, “Those who recite all the mantras / Will always have confidence in their recitations and fire sacrifice.”
n.­1284
sangs rgyas rnams kyi bstan pa ni/ /sngags su rab gnas de ’dir gsungs/ /sngags de rnam par mi rtog par/ /cho ga de ’dir gsungs pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The teachings of the buddhas / Have been taught here in terms of mantra. / In this manual those mantras / Have been taught in a nonconceptual way.”
n.­1285
/de tshe ’gro ba blo bzhin du/ /’jig rten kun gyi dge mi dge/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is partly based on the Tibetan as the Skt. is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “The virtue and nonvirtue present in all the worlds / Accords with the minds of beings at that time.”
n.­1286
“He” probably refers to the king of mantras‍—Mañjughoṣa‍—mentioned two verses below.
n.­1287
de nyid cho ga ’dir spros pa/ /de bzhin gshegs pa spros pa med/ /’jig rten ’das pa rdzogs sangs rgyas/ /’jig rten phyir ni ’dir gsungs so/ D. The grammar of this verse was interpreted to accord with the Tibetan. This required reading the BHS nominative plural (tathāgatā) as an instrumental plural (tathāgataiḥ). The Tibetan translates as, “That which is elaborated on in this manual / Was taught here for the sake of the world / By the tathāgatas who lack mental elaborations, / The perfect buddhas who transcend the world.”
n.­1288
las rnams kun la shin tu lhag/ /’jig rten las las rab tu ’das/ /chos rnams rnam pa sna tshogs byed/ /’jig rten kun gyis rab tu bsngags/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It far surpasses all [other] activities, / And is an activity that transcends worldly activities. / It engages the great variety of dharmas, / And is highly praised in all the worlds.”
n.­1289
de don yon tan nges grub dang / /’jig rten khams kyi dge mi dge/ /bag med ma bskul ma yin te/ /bskul nas ngas ni chos bshad do/ D. Skt. 15.234cd is probably corrupt, and the translation here is merely a conjecture. The Tibetan is also obscure. One possible translation is, “For that purpose there is virtue and nonvirtue / In the qualities accomplished in the world. / Do not be careless and not request [teachings]; / Request them and I will explain the doctrine.”
n.­1290
ngas kyang bshad pa yin/ Tib. “By me” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
n.­1291
kun mkhyen ye shes rab ’jug la/ /las rnams gcig tu bsngags pa yin/ /’jig rten sngon las bdag yin te/ /de ni da ltar yongs su spyod/ D. The Tibetan seems to reflect the extant Skt. but interprets it differently and translates as, “Among ways to generate omniscient knowledge, / These activities alone are praiseworthy; / I [performed] this activity in previous worlds, / And [perform] them now in this one.”
n.­1292
las ni ’di la’ang snang ’gyur na/ /skye ba ’di la ’grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When these activties do manifest, / They will succeed in this birth.”
n.­1293
sgrub pa pos ni bsgrub par bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then the practitioner will be successful.”
n.­1294
shin tu yun ring dag gis ’grub/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Will succeed after a long time.”
n.­1295
The reference is made here to the immediately preceding chapter.
n.­1296
blo dang ldan pa gnod sbyin gyi bdag po lag na rdo rjes nga la dris nas/ ’jam dpal khyod kyi don thams cad bya ba’i las kyi le’u rab ’byam ’khor gyi dkyil ’khor gyi nang du rgya cher sngar bstan pa yin no/ D. This paragraph has been translated mainly from the Tibetan. In the Skt. it begins with “Listen, Mañjuśrī!” The clause “Requested by … in his hand” comes at the end of the paragraph and possibly serves to introduce the verse that follows. The Skt. also includes the phrase “I will [now] teach…” (future tense) which seems to clash with the past tense (“I taught”) of the immediately following section that sums up the previous chapter.
n.­1297
sngags kyi zlos pa bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to the Skt. kathitaṃ mantra­jāpinām (“[all this] was taught for/with reference to the mantra reciters”) translates as, “the recitation of mantras has been taught.”
n.­1359
From this chapter onward, the chapter numbers are out of step with those in the Tibetan translation. Chapters 18 to 23 in the Sanskrit text are not included in the Tibetan translation of the text and are not translated here.
n.­1487
kye kye gza’ dang rgyu skar kyi tshogs rnams khyed cag thams cad nyon cig Tib. “The planets and the nakṣatras” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
n.­1488
sngags dang / rgyud dang / dbang bskur ba dang / dkyil ’khor dang / D. The Tibetan reads the compound mantra­tantrābhiṣeka­maṇḍala as a dvandva that translates as, “the mantra, the tantra, the empowerment, and the maṇḍala.”
n.­1489
“Homa” om. Tib.
n.­1490
The grammar of this part, starting from “This sovereign,” is not very clear.
n.­1491
sems can ma rungs pa thams cad kyang dgag par gyis shig /bstan par gyis shig D. “Restrained/stopped” (roddhavyāni) is omitted in the Tibetan.
n.­1521
“Again” om. Tib.
n.­1522
“But now only briefly” om. Tib.
n.­1523
ras ris kyi tshad rgya che ba’i sbyor ba sgrub pa nyams par ’gyur bas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The practice of executing the painting in its extended version has degenerated.”
n.­1616
’jam dpal bstan pa ’di ni de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi nor du gyur pa/ chos kyi mdzod ’jig rten pa rnams kyi bsam pa ’bras bu dang bcas pa byed pa’i phyir nor bu rin po che lta bur gyur pa’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This teaching, Mañjuśrī, is the jewel of all the tathāgatas. This treasure chest of Dharma is like a wish fulfilling jewel because it brings the wishes of worldly beings to fruition.”
n.­1617
sems can thams cad kyi bsams pa yongs su rdzogs par bya ba’i phyir cho ga bzhin du bzas pa byas na thob pa yin no/ D. The phrase, “will fulfill the wishes of all beings” is based on the Tibetan, which translates as, “Since it can fulfill the wishes of all beings, if one has recited the mantra following the proper procedure, one will attain the result.” Sections of this line are not found in the Skt.
n.­1618
“Tathāgata-vidyārājas” must refer to other uṣṇīṣa kings‍—Sitātapatra, Tejorāśi, and so forth.
n.­1685
ras ris dang po Tib. In place of “in front of this painting,” the Tibetan has “this first painting.”
n.­1686
’di nyid kyi yi ge gcig pa’i snying po’i sngags sam yi ge drug po ma’i mtha’ can khyod kyi sngar bstan pa’i yi ge drug pa’i snying po’am dang po na oM yod pa’i yi ge gcig pa’i ras ris dang po ’di nyid kyi cho gar ’gyur ba ni phyi ma’i dus phyi ma’i tshe na D. It is not clear in the Skt. why the “one-syllable mantra” is mentioned twice and whether it is the same one-syllable mantra or not. The Tibetan translates as, “It will be the ritual of this first painting‍—whether it be this one’s single-syllable heart mantra, the six-syllable mantra ending with ma, your aforementioned six-syllable heart mantra, or the single-syllable mantra with oṃ first‍—that, at a later time in the future … /”
n.­1804
’jam dpal khyod kyi sngags dang rgyud dang rig pa’i rgyal po dang ’khor los sgyur ba la sogs pa dang de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi gtsug tor la sogs pa dang sngags thams cad kyi grub pa’i gnas yod de/ Tib. “Tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas,” here and elsewhere in the MMK, refers to the deities called uṣṇīṣa kings. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, there are places where one can accomplish your mantra system, the vidyādhara and cakravartin and the like, all of the tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas and the like, and all mantras.”
n.­1805
The word tathāgata has a feminine ending in the Skt. This could be either a corruption or could reflect the gender of vidyā (feminine).
n.­1877
rig pa thams cad la ’os pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “they are applicable to all vidyās.”
n.­1899
A nirdeśa is a type of an explanatory text, usually on religious or philosophical matters.
n.­1900
’jam dpal khyod kyi cho ga’i rgyal po chos kyi dbyings kyi mdzod/ de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po/ chos kyi dbyings kyi rgyu mthun pa’i rjes su spyod pa/ mdo chen po’i mchog /rin po che’i le’u de bzhin gshegs pa’i gsang ba’i mchog rjes su gnang ba/ sngags kyi mchog sgrub pa la rgyu mtshan shes pa dang rtags dang dus gzhan shes pa’i sgrub pa’i thabs rnams nges par bstan cing yang dag par bstan no/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, your king of manuals is a treasury of the sphere of phenomena, the essence of the tathāgatas that proceeds in harmony with the sphere of phenomena and is supreme among the great sūtras. This precious chapter definitively and accurately teaches the authorization that is the supreme secret of the tathāgatas, understanding the reason for accomplishing the supreme mantra, and other methods for accomplishing knowledge of signs and times.”
n.­2238
khyod kyi phyag rgya D. “Root” is omitted in the Tibetan.
n.­2254
sems can thams cad kyi lam du gyur pa yin no/ D. The Tibetan includes an additional line here that translates as, “It has become the path of all beings.” The Tibetan and Skt. diverge at this point (Skt. 37.2.2, D. 276.b.1). The following is a list of the correspondences in material between the Tibetan and Skt. texts following the folio enumeration in the Rockwell Degé Kangyur:

D. 276.b.1–277.a.2 = Skt. 37.10–37.16.
D. 277.a.2–277.a.7 = Skt. 37.2.2–37.4.3 (Skt. 37.4.4–37.5.2 om. Tib.).
D. 277.a.7–277.b.2 = Skt. 37.5.3.4–37.9 (Skt. 37.8 om. Tib.).

The Tibetan text then begins to align again with the Skt. at D. 277.b.2, which corresponds to the material in Skt. 37.17.
n.­2456
As becomes clear later in this chapter, the association of the mudrā with whatever deity determines its position in the maṇḍala.
n.­2457
’jam dpal mdor na nyon cig phyag rgya’i mtshan nyid dang sngags rnams kyi rgya che ba dang dkyil ’khor gyi cho ga’i mdor bsdus pa dang dam tshig la rjes su ’jug cing phyag rgya’i gnas dang sngags thams cad dang rgyud de dag thams cad la gsang ba dang bcas pa’i dkyil ’khor ni/. The syntax and clause divisions in this paragraph are difficult to ascertain in the Skt., which makes the translation proposed here unreliable. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, listen to this brief explanation. The following is a summary of the features of the mudrās, the extensive mantras, and the maṇḍala procedure, acting in accord with the samaya and the arrangement of the mudrās, all of the mantras, and the maṇḍala that contains what is concealed in all of the tantras.”
n.­2458
sngags shes bdag nyid chen po dang / /yon tan kun kyang bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan syntax is obscure. One possible translation might be, “They also taught about great beings / Who are versed in mantra and all the good qualities.”
n.­2485
The chapter number jumps from 38 to 50 here because the chapters from 39 to 49 have been left out as they are missing from the Tibetan translation.
n.­2486
“Bowed” om. Tib.
n.­2487
de’i cho ga rgya che ba bcom ldan ’das kyi bka’ ma stsal la/ J, K; de’i cho ga rgya che ba bcom ldan ’das kyi bka’ stsal pa/ D. Following J and K, the Tibetan translates as, “the Blessed One has not explained the extensive ritual.”
n.­2540
gshin rje’i ’tsho ba mthar byed pa/ Tib. Here the Tibetan translates Vaivasvata following the standard Tibetan translation for Yama.
n.­2541
gtsor byed pa byang chub sems dpa’ ’jam dpal gyis smras pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “That was taught by the preeminent bodhisattva Mañjuśrī.”
n.­2605
“You are exceedingly cruel” om. Tib.
n.­2606
’khor ba’i ’ching ba las grol bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “they liberate them from the bonds of cyclic existence.”
n.­2758
“From his samādhi” (literally, “from that samādhi”) is probably a reference to the samādhi called the buddha’s blessing through miraculous transformation that the Buddha had entered in 50.­4 above, i.e., at the beginning of the Yamāntaka section. This section ended at the conclusion of the previous chapter.
n.­3397
dpal lha btsan po lha btsun pa byang chub ’od kyi bkas/ rgya gar gyi mkhan po dge bsnyen chen po ku mA ra ka la sha dang / sgra sgyur gyi lo ts+tsha ba dge slong shAkya blo gros kyis bsgyur cing zhus te gtan la phab pa’o// //.
n.­3398
Cf. bibliography.
n.­3399
oṁ] B; om. S
n.­3400
māḍe] S; māṇḍe B
n.­3401
bhavanto] B; om. S
n.­3402
mañjuśriyaḥ] B; mañjuśriyasya S
n.­3403
°rddhi°] em.; °riddhi° B; °śuddhi° S
n.­3404
ārogyaiśvaryaṃ] B; ārogyaiś carya° S
n.­3405
°paripūrakāṇi] B; °pāpāripūrakāṇi S
n.­3406
te] S; śṛṇu ca sādhu bhagavān iti B
n.­4349
paṭalavisarāt] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); paṭalavisaraḥ S
n.­4350
°bīja°] em.; °bījam S
n.­4427
āmantrayate] em.; āmantrayeta S
n.­4498
The MMK text seems to favor the spelling sādhanopayika rather than sādhanopāyika.
n.­4509
sādhanopāyikaṃ] em.; sādhakamopayikaṃ S
n.­4521
ārabhet] em.; ārabhe S
n.­4522
°puṣpānāṃ] conj.; °puṣpāṃ S
n.­4723
punar api] em. (supported by D); punar api punar api S
n.­4724
tvadīya°] conj. M; tvadīyaṃ S
n.­4725
°upacaryā°] em. (M); °opacaryā° S
n.­4726
This entire paragraph is missing from A.
n.­4727
Here resumes the correspondence with manuscript A.
n.­4728
uttiṣṭha] S; tiṣṭha tiṣṭha A
n.­4832
°sarvārtha] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °sarvathā S
n.­4907
avalokya] em.; alokya S
n.­4908
tadā] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); mudā S
n.­4928
°ākṛṣṭavān] em.; °ākṛṣṭavā S
n.­4945
From this chapter onward, the chapter numbers here are out of step with those in the Tibetan version. Chapters 18 to 23 are missing from the Tibetan text and have been left out of the Sanskrit edition here.
n.­4946
grahān] em.; grahāṇ R; grahaṇ° S
n.­4947
°svavākyaṃ] S; °svākṣaṃ R
n.­4948
nirdeśayituṃ] S; vavidarśayituṃ R
n.­4949
sādhayantu] S; sādhitu R
n.­4950
samaye ca tiṣṭhantu bhavantaḥ] R; om. S
n.­5305
°vidhānaṃ | na ca] em.; °vidhāna nica S
n.­5321
siddhiṃ] em.; siddhiḥ S
n.­5366
°akṣareṇa] em.; °ākṣareṇa S
n.­5397
saptamaṃ] A; saptamaḥ S
n.­5398
yo] S; ye A
n.­5399
sādhayiṣyati] A; sādhayiṣyanti S
n.­5400
saphalā sukhodayā sukhavipākā] A; saphalāḥ sukhodayāḥ sukhavipākāḥ S
n.­5401
°nivāraṇīyā] S; °nivāraṇi A
n.­5402
tasya bodhiparāyaṇīyā] S; tasyā vādhiparāyaṇi A
n.­5436
sedhiṣyate] conj. (on the authority of the Tib.); 'sya trasyati (unmetrical) S
n.­5450
yasyedānīṃ] em.; yasyedānī S
n.­5477
samanupraveśaṃ] em.; samanupraveśa° S
n.­5487
nirdeśa°] em.; nirdiśa° S
n.­5488
°vara°] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °vadha° S
n.­5527
°mantraṃ] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °tantraṃ S
n.­5528
puṇyākāme] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); puṇyakāme S
n.­5529
anabhiṣikte] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); avabhiṣikta S
n.­5619
saṃyojyaṃ] em.; saṃyojya S
n.­5670
Śāstrī, who rendered this paragraph in verse, indicates a missing pāda at this point. The passage, however, seems to be in prose, as corroborated by the Tibetan, with no text missing.
n.­5671
sarvatantreṣu] conj. (based on the Tib.); sarvamantreṣu S
n.­5679
The number here jumps from 38 to 50 because chapters from 39 to 49 have been left out as they are missing from the Tibetan translation.
n.­5691
ādau] A; mahābodhi­sattvasyādau S
n.­5692
bhaya] A; bhayam S
n.­5790
vajrapāṇe] em.; vajrapāṇeḥ S
n.­6072
°bodhisattvā°] Y; °bodhi­sattva° S
n.­6073
°āvṛhā°] em.; °ātṛhā° S
n.­6782
tatrāhaṃ] em.; tatrāha S
n.­6783
°vidyādhara°] em.; °vidyādharaḥ S
n.­6784
veditavyāḥ] em.; veditavyaḥ S
n.­6785
sthāne] em.; sthāno S
n.­6786
lekhayiṣyati] em.; likhyati S
n.­6787
°cūrṇa°] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °pūrṇa°

b.

Bibliography

Source Texts (Sanskrit)

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the National Archives, Kathmandu (Bir 157), accession no. 3/303. Microfilmed by NGMPP, reel A 136/11. Bears the title Mañjuśrī­jñāna­tantra.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the National Archives, Kathmandu, accession no. 5/814. Microfilmed by NGMPP, reel A 39/04.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the National Archives, Kathmandu (Bir 45), accession no. 3/645. Microfilmed by NGMPP, reel A 124/14.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the Oriental Research Institute and Manuscripts Library, Thiruvanantha­puram, accession no. C-2388.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in Tokyo University Library, no. 275 in Matsunami’s catalog (Matsunami 1965).

Śāstrī, T. Gaṇapati, ed. The Āryamañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Vols 1–3. Trivandrum Sanskrit Series 70, 76, and 84. Trivandrum: Superintendent Government Press, 1920–25.

Vaidya, P. L., ed. Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Mahāyāna­sūtra­saṃgraha, Part II. Buddhist Sanskrit Texts 18. Darbhanga: The Mithila Institute of Postgraduate Studies and Research in Sanskrit Learning, 1964.

Source Texts (Tibetan)

’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud (Mañjuśrī­mūla­tantra). Toh. 543, Degé Kangyur vol. 88 (rgyud ’bum, na), folios 105.a–351.a.

’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud (Mañjuśrī­mūla­tantra). bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–2009. vol. 88, pp. 354–1051.

ral pa gyen brdzes kyi rtog pa chen po (Tārāmūlakalpa). Toh. 724, Degé Kangyur vol. 93 (rgyud ’bum, tsa), folios 205.b–311.a, continued in vol. 94 (rgyud ’bum, tsha), folios 1.b–200.a.

Secondary Sources

Agrawala, V. S. “The meaning of Kumārī Dvīpa.” Sārdha-Śatābdī: Special Volume of Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bombay (June 1959): 1–5.

Bunce, Fredrick W. Mudrās in Buddhist and Hindu Practices: An Iconographic Consideration. New Delhi: D. K. Printworld, 2005.

Delhey, Martin. (forthcoming). Early Buddhist Tantra: New Light on the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa from Manuscript Evidence. (forthcoming).

Delhey, Martin. (2008). Three unpublished handouts made for the First International Workshop on Early Tantra, Kathmandu, 2008, containing editions of chapters 12, 13, and 51 of the MMK, based on the NAK manuscript accession no. 5/814, reel A 39/04.

Delhey, Martin. (2012). “The Textual Sources of the Mañjuśriya­mūla­kalpa (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa), With Special Reference to Its Early Nepalese Witness NGMPP A39/4.” Journal of the Nepal Research Centre Vol. XIV (2012): 55–75.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. The Ratnaketu Dhāraṇī (Ratna­ketu­dhāraṇī, Toh 138). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2023). The Queen of Incantations: The Great Peahen (Toh 559). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Edgerton, Franklin. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1970.

Gray, David B. The Cakrasaṃvara Tantra (The Discourse of Śrī Heruka). A Study and Annotated Translation. New York: American Institute of Buddhist Studies, Columbia University, 2007.

Hartzell, James F. “The Buddhist Sanskrit Tantras: ‘The Samādhi of the Plowed Row.’ ” Pacific World: Journal of the Institute of Buddhist Studies 14 (Fall 2012): 63–178.

Jayaswal, K. P. An Imperial History of India in a Sanskrit Text (c. 700 B.C.–c. 770 A.D.) with a Special Commentary on Later Gupta Period. Lahore: Motilal Banarsidass, 1934.

Matsunaga, Yūkei. “On the date of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa.” In Tantric and Taoist Studies in Honour of R. A. Stein, edited by M. Strickmann. Vol. 3: Mélanges chinois et bouddhiques 22, 882–894. Brussels: Institut belge des hautes études chinoises, 1985.

Matsunami, Seiren. A Catalogue of the Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Tokyo University Library. Tokyo: Suzuki Research Foundation, 1965.

Mical, Wiesiek, and Paul Thomas. “Do Kriyā Tantras Have a Doctrine? ‍— The Case of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa.” Unpublished manuscipt, 2017. https://ku-np.academia.edu/wiesiekmical.

Przyluski, Jean. “Les Vidyārāja, contribution à l’histoire de la magie dans les sectes Mahāyānistes.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 23 (1923): 301–18.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2018), trans. The King of Samādhis Sūtra (Samādhi­rāja­sūtra, Toh 127). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2021a), trans. The Stem Array (Gaṇḍavyūha, chapter 45 of the Avataṃsakasūtra, Toh 44). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2021b), trans. The Ten Bhūmis (Daśabhūmika, Toh 44-31). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2023), trans. The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (1) (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra, Toh 555). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Saṅkṛtyāyana, Rāhula. “The text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, corrected with the help of the Tibetan text.” In An Imperial History of India in a Sanskrit Text (c. 700 B.C.–c. 770 A.D.) with a Special Commentary on Later Gupta Period by K. P. Jayasawal, addendum 1–75. Lahore: Motilal Banarsidass, 1934.

Wallis, G. Mediating the Power of Buddhas: Ritual in the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Albany: State University of New York Press, 2002.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

Ābha

Wylie:
  • kun nas ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ནས་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • ābha

One of the tathāgatas attending the delivery of the MMK.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­39
g.­2

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

A class of gods.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­167
g.­3

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­155
  • 5.­8
  • 53.­1
g.­20

ācārya

Wylie:
  • slob dpon
Tibetan:
  • སློབ་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • ācārya

See “master.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­202-203
  • 28.­18
  • n.­492
  • n.­3315
  • g.­1023
g.­22

accomplishment

Wylie:
  • dngos grub
Tibetan:
  • དངོས་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhi

Accomplishment or success in general, as well as any particular magical power or ability. In the latter sense, eight are traditionally enumerated, namely the siddhi of the magical sword, of an eye ointment that renders invisible, etc. The content of the list may vary from source to source.

Located in 267 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­31
  • 1.­33
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­66
  • 1.­118
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­110
  • 2.­113
  • 2.­117
  • 2.­131
  • 2.­180
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­196
  • 4.­2-3
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­33-34
  • 4.­36
  • 4.­41-43
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­60
  • 4.­62
  • 5.­12
  • 5.­16
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­7-8
  • 7.­29
  • 9.­15
  • 10.­15
  • 10.­17
  • 10.­19-20
  • 10.­23-24
  • 10.­27
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­59
  • 11.­22-23
  • 11.­26-27
  • 11.­31
  • 11.­41
  • 11.­63
  • 11.­92-93
  • 11.­96
  • 11.­99-101
  • 11.­134
  • 11.­137
  • 11.­154
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­203
  • 11.­231
  • 11.­236
  • 11.­240-241
  • 11.­247-248
  • 11.­251-252
  • 11.­255
  • 11.­270
  • 11.­272
  • 12.­12
  • 12.­17
  • 12.­50
  • 13.­16
  • 13.­18
  • 13.­40-41
  • 13.­57-58
  • 13.­65
  • 13.­67-68
  • 13.­70
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­77
  • 14.­84
  • 14.­92-93
  • 14.­99
  • 14.­119
  • 14.­136-140
  • 14.­151
  • 14.­155
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­60
  • 15.­94-95
  • 15.­97
  • 15.­114
  • 15.­116
  • 15.­119-120
  • 15.­122-124
  • 15.­129
  • 15.­134
  • 15.­137
  • 15.­150-151
  • 15.­153-154
  • 15.­182
  • 15.­211-212
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­226
  • 15.­239-240
  • 16.­16
  • 16.­20
  • 16.­26
  • 16.­30
  • 17.­5
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­5
  • 24.­9-10
  • 24.­34
  • 24.­40
  • 24.­200
  • 25.­14
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­38
  • 26.­15-16
  • 26.­33
  • 26.­37
  • 26.­50
  • 26.­56
  • 27.­4
  • 27.­20
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­52
  • 27.­71
  • 27.­78
  • 27.­80-82
  • 27.­85-86
  • 28.­47
  • 28.­52-53
  • 29.­2
  • 30.­8-9
  • 30.­19
  • 30.­40
  • 30.­42-43
  • 30.­49
  • 30.­51
  • 31.­25
  • 32.­2-6
  • 32.­8
  • 32.­10-12
  • 32.­16
  • 32.­18
  • 32.­20-21
  • 32.­25
  • 32.­27
  • 32.­29
  • 32.­32-34
  • 32.­42
  • 33.­2
  • 33.­18
  • 33.­22
  • 33.­28-29
  • 33.­44
  • 33.­50
  • 33.­84
  • 33.­113-114
  • 33.­125
  • 34.­5
  • 34.­19
  • 34.­28
  • 35.­210
  • 35.­297
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­70
  • 37.­76
  • 38.­33-34
  • 50.­3
  • 51.­50-51
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­86
  • 52.­99
  • 52.­104
  • 53.­249-250
  • 53.­382
  • 53.­384
  • 53.­418
  • 53.­518
  • 53.­526
  • 53.­811
  • 53.­821
  • 53.­845
  • 53.­848
  • 53.­850
  • 54.­80
  • n.­272
  • n.­319
  • n.­470
  • n.­565
  • n.­602
  • n.­607
  • n.­666
  • n.­868
  • n.­928
  • n.­938
  • n.­1019
  • n.­1161
  • n.­1198
  • n.­1227
  • n.­1230
  • n.­1237
  • n.­1255
  • n.­1307
  • n.­1654
  • n.­1661
  • n.­1781-1782
  • n.­1833
  • n.­1879
  • n.­1881
  • n.­1916
  • n.­2007
  • n.­2200
  • n.­3192
  • g.­888
  • g.­1508
g.­25

activity

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karman

A ritual activity (such as pacifying, nourishing, etc.). This term is also translated in other instances as “rite,” “karma,” “karman,” or “karmic accumulation.” In the latter three cases the term refers to karmic accumulation, positive or negative, that will produce results in the future, unless it is purified.

Located in 265 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­54
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­47
  • 2.­52
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­116-117
  • 2.­123
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­198
  • 3.­1
  • 4.­35
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­72
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­30
  • 8.­1
  • 9.­15
  • 10.­2
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­160
  • 11.­192
  • 11.­214
  • 11.­248-250
  • 11.­253-255
  • 11.­260
  • 13.­2-4
  • 13.­17
  • 13.­24
  • 13.­38-39
  • 13.­47-48
  • 13.­55-57
  • 13.­59
  • 13.­63
  • 13.­65-67
  • 14.­7-8
  • 14.­47
  • 14.­68-69
  • 14.­113
  • 14.­134
  • 14.­136
  • 14.­155-156
  • 14.­172
  • 14.­175
  • 14.­180
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­4
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­57
  • 15.­61
  • 15.­67
  • 15.­70
  • 15.­75
  • 15.­79
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­87-88
  • 15.­90-93
  • 15.­95-96
  • 15.­116
  • 15.­124
  • 15.­151
  • 15.­155
  • 15.­174
  • 15.­182
  • 15.­187
  • 15.­198
  • 15.­210-211
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­233
  • 15.­236-241
  • 15.­243
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­9
  • 16.­14
  • 17.­7-8
  • 24.­33-34
  • 24.­85
  • 24.­177
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­22
  • 25.­24
  • 26.­49
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­16-17
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­75-76
  • 28.­1
  • 28.­45
  • 30.­7
  • 32.­5-6
  • 32.­39
  • 33.­36
  • 33.­42
  • 33.­46
  • 33.­96-97
  • 33.­126
  • 34.­14-16
  • 34.­20-21
  • 35.­56
  • 35.­64
  • 35.­70
  • 35.­72-73
  • 35.­82
  • 35.­87
  • 35.­93
  • 35.­106
  • 35.­117
  • 35.­134
  • 35.­137
  • 35.­144
  • 35.­160
  • 35.­167
  • 35.­176
  • 35.­181-182
  • 35.­184
  • 35.­186
  • 35.­192
  • 35.­198
  • 35.­206
  • 35.­210
  • 35.­217-218
  • 35.­245
  • 35.­283
  • 35.­285
  • 36.­1
  • 36.­12-14
  • 36.­17
  • 37.­2
  • 37.­17
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­37
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­64
  • 37.­68-69
  • 37.­71-72
  • 37.­77
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­81-85
  • 37.­89-91
  • 37.­93
  • 37.­95-96
  • 37.­98-99
  • 37.­101-103
  • 37.­105
  • 37.­117
  • 37.­122
  • 38.­34
  • 51.­50-51
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­129
  • 52.­148
  • 53.­62
  • 53.­174
  • 53.­176
  • 53.­573
  • 53.­585
  • 53.­889
  • 53.­922
  • n.­297
  • n.­636
  • n.­662
  • n.­800
  • n.­937-938
  • n.­941
  • n.­960
  • n.­1008
  • n.­1028
  • n.­1034
  • n.­1075
  • n.­1147
  • n.­1155
  • n.­1160
  • n.­1166
  • n.­1173-1174
  • n.­1181
  • n.­1227
  • n.­1288
  • n.­1291
  • n.­1330
  • n.­1335
  • n.­1339
  • n.­1377
  • n.­1417
  • n.­1424
  • n.­1654
  • n.­1676
  • n.­1881
  • n.­1888
  • n.­1946
  • n.­2000
  • n.­2004
  • n.­2192
  • n.­2320
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2394
  • n.­2432
  • n.­2451
  • n.­2483
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2648
  • n.­2841
  • n.­3311
  • g.­695
  • g.­1341
g.­30

adept of vidyās

Wylie:
  • rig ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རིག་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyādhara

See “vidyādhara.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­7
  • g.­2039
g.­37

affliction

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • kleśa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The essentially pure nature of mind is obscured and afflicted by various psychological defilements, which destroy the mind’s peace and composure and lead to unwholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind, acting as causes for continued existence in saṃsāra. Included among them are the primary afflictions of desire (rāga), anger (dveṣa), and ignorance (avidyā). It is said that there are eighty-four thousand of these negative mental qualities, for which the eighty-four thousand categories of the Buddha’s teachings serve as the antidote.

Kleśa is also commonly translated as “negative emotions,” “disturbing emotions,” and so on. The Pāli kilesa, Middle Indic kileśa, and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kleśa all primarily mean “stain” or “defilement.” The translation “affliction” is a secondary development that derives from the more general (non-Buddhist) classical understanding of √kliś (“to harm,“ “to afflict”). Both meanings are noted by Buddhist commentators.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­58
  • 24.­221
  • 33.­120
  • 35.­67
  • 37.­5
  • 51.­74
  • 53.­197
  • 53.­332
  • 53.­674
  • 54.­29
  • n.­31
  • n.­3364
  • g.­491
  • g.­1127
g.­57

Akaniṣṭha

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha

The highest heaven in the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­35
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 5.­8
  • 10.­7
  • 14.­98
  • 15.­192
  • 26.­13
  • 31.­30
  • 37.­46
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­18
  • 53.­49
  • 53.­116
  • n.­2328
  • n.­2366
  • n.­2809
g.­128

Aṅgāraka

Wylie:
  • mig dmar
Tibetan:
  • མིག་དམར།
Sanskrit:
  • aṅgāraka

The planet Mars.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­94
  • g.­1018
g.­131

angular cubit

Wylie:
  • khru gang
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲུ་གང་།
Sanskrit:
  • hasta

See “cubit.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­9
  • 11.­65
  • 11.­190
  • 24.­61
  • n.­785
  • n.­810
  • g.­360
g.­132

angular yoke

Wylie:
  • gnya’ shing
Tibetan:
  • གཉའ་ཤིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • yuga

See “yoke.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­163
  • n.­785
  • n.­809-810
  • g.­2157
g.­139

Anurādhā

Wylie:
  • lha mtshams
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མཚམས།
Sanskrit:
  • anurādhā

The name of a nakṣatra.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­153
  • 24.­7
  • 24.­85
  • 24.­91
  • 24.­137
  • 24.­181
  • 24.­220
  • n.­1433
g.­146

Apramāṇa

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇa

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­148

Aquarius

Wylie:
  • bum pa
Tibetan:
  • བུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbha

See “Kumbha.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­85
  • 24.­103
  • n.­1422
  • g.­796
g.­153

arhat

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat

“Worthy one” is an epithet applied to the original (usually sixteen) disciples of the Buddha; also a term for any being who attained nirvāṇa by following the Hīnayāna vehicle.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­37
  • 27.­3-4
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­27-28
  • 27.­42
  • 35.­41
  • 37.­38
  • 50.­49
  • 51.­54
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­7-8
  • 53.­14
  • 53.­81
  • 53.­103
  • 53.­188
  • 53.­220-221
  • n.­1619
  • n.­2799
  • n.­2805
  • g.­490
  • g.­610
  • g.­1294
g.­154

Aries

Wylie:
  • lug
Tibetan:
  • ལུག
Sanskrit:
  • meṣa

See “Meṣa.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­84
  • 24.­5
  • 24.­52
  • g.­1042
g.­169

Asaṅga

Wylie:
  • thogs med
Tibetan:
  • ཐོགས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṅga

Famous Yogācāra scholar.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 53.­452
  • n.­26
g.­177

aspect

Wylie:
  • mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dṛṣṭi

A technical term used in astrology. It means that one planet or astrological entity influences another such entity, because of the angle that it is positioned in relation to it.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­160
  • 15.­162
  • 15.­164
  • 15.­180
  • 24.­62
  • 24.­104
  • n.­1234
  • n.­1391
g.­180

asura

Wylie:
  • lha min
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura

A class of divine beings ranking below gods (deva), known for their jealous and warlike disposition.

Located in 75 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­93
  • 4.­34
  • 10.­6-7
  • 11.­85
  • 11.­127
  • 11.­131
  • 11.­264
  • 12.­15
  • 12.­23
  • 13.­52
  • 15.­85
  • 15.­190
  • 17.­3
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­18
  • 24.­125
  • 24.­205
  • 25.­13
  • 26.­41
  • 28.­42
  • 30.­21
  • 32.­13
  • 33.­83
  • 34.­16
  • 36.­13
  • 37.­7
  • 37.­28
  • 37.­60
  • 37.­73
  • 38.­28
  • 52.­95
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­51
  • 53.­63
  • 53.­74
  • 53.­79
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­233
  • 53.­238
  • 53.­422
  • 53.­909
  • 53.­916
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­54
  • 54.­56
  • 54.­66-69
  • 54.­104
  • n.­725
  • n.­1263-1264
  • n.­1570
  • n.­1768
  • n.­1770
  • n.­2004
  • n.­2350-2351
  • n.­2370
  • n.­3338
  • n.­3348
  • g.­182
  • g.­209
  • g.­223
  • g.­368
  • g.­383
  • g.­776
  • g.­1181
  • g.­1235
  • g.­1293
  • g.­1592
  • g.­2027
g.­187

Atapas

Wylie:
  • mi gdung ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གདུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • atapas

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­157
  • 5.­8
  • 53.­1
g.­207

Avṛha

Wylie:
  • mi che ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཆེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • avṛha

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­157
  • 53.­1
g.­208

awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhi

This may be awakening in the literal sense, as from sleep, but in the Buddhist context it is the awakening from ignorance, i.e., the direct realization of truth.

Located in 137 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5-6
  • i.­9
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­118
  • 2.­112
  • 2.­130-131
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­203
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­41-42
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­13
  • 7.­27
  • 7.­29
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­12
  • 9.­19
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­57
  • 11.­137
  • 11.­141
  • 11.­199
  • 11.­257
  • 11.­260
  • 14.­6-7
  • 14.­101
  • 14.­110
  • 14.­113
  • 14.­133
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­217
  • 15.­219
  • 15.­242
  • 16.­29
  • 16.­31
  • 17.­21-22
  • 17.­25
  • 24.­24
  • 24.­28
  • 24.­30
  • 24.­32
  • 27.­3
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­43
  • 28.­49
  • 29.­2
  • 30.­44
  • 31.­23
  • 33.­103
  • 34.­8
  • 35.­305
  • 37.­2
  • 37.­66
  • 37.­70
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­104
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 50.­20
  • 50.­22
  • 52.­6
  • 53.­7-8
  • 53.­92
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­104
  • 53.­329
  • 53.­352
  • 53.­367
  • 53.­375
  • 53.­390
  • 53.­400
  • 53.­404
  • 53.­448
  • 53.­455
  • 53.­483
  • 53.­496
  • 53.­500
  • 53.­516
  • 53.­524
  • 53.­529
  • 53.­546
  • 53.­594
  • 53.­611
  • 53.­630
  • 53.­768
  • 53.­778
  • 53.­780
  • 53.­786
  • 53.­808
  • 53.­818-819
  • 53.­876
  • 53.­896
  • 53.­921
  • 53.­923
  • 54.­11
  • 54.­21
  • 54.­85
  • 54.­99
  • n.­5
  • n.­392
  • n.­471
  • n.­624
  • n.­1279
  • n.­1319-1321
  • n.­1344
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2508
  • n.­2611
  • n.­2761
  • n.­2772
  • n.­2799
  • n.­2806
  • n.­2908
  • n.­2946
  • n.­2948
  • n.­2962
  • n.­2964
  • n.­3192
  • n.­3230
  • g.­293
  • g.­610
  • g.­1251
  • g.­1763
g.­227

barbarian

Wylie:
  • kla klo
Tibetan:
  • ཀླ་ཀློ།
Sanskrit:
  • mleccha

See “mleccha.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­32
  • 24.­132
  • 24.­138
  • 24.­211
  • g.­1046
g.­292

bodhicitta

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi sems
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་སེམས།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhicitta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the general Mahāyāna teachings the mind of awakening (bodhicitta) is the intention to attain the complete awakening of a perfect buddha for the sake of all beings. On the level of absolute truth, the mind of awakening is the realization of the awakened state itself.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­59
  • 1.­112
  • 1.­119
  • 2.­130
  • 2.­178
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­196
  • 4.­7
  • 7.­23
  • 14.­84
  • 14.­132
  • 15.­128
  • 27.­32
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­49
  • 30.­43
  • 34.­8
  • n.­1643
  • n.­3230
g.­293

bodhisattva

Wylie:
  • byang chub sems dpa’
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhisattva

A person/being (sattva) who has vowed to attain awakening (bodhi) in order to free all beings from cyclic existence.

Located in 499 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1
  • i.­5-6
  • 1.­1-4
  • 1.­6
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­14-15
  • 1.­19-21
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­32-35
  • 1.­37-38
  • 1.­40
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­51-52
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­66
  • 1.­68
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­74
  • 1.­76
  • 1.­80
  • 1.­84
  • 1.­93
  • 1.­106-109
  • 1.­111-120
  • 1.­123
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­20-21
  • 2.­23-24
  • 2.­31
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­36-37
  • 2.­40-41
  • 2.­70
  • 2.­72-73
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­79
  • 2.­87
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­92
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­98
  • 2.­100
  • 2.­107-109
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­141
  • 2.­146-147
  • 2.­149
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­178-179
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­186-187
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­197-199
  • 2.­202-204
  • 2.­207-209
  • 2.­211
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­11
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­3
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­9-10
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­67
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­74
  • 4.­80-81
  • 4.­83
  • 4.­115-116
  • 5.­21
  • 6.­13
  • 7.­1-2
  • 7.­12
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­4-5
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10-13
  • 9.­2
  • 9.­19-22
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­57-58
  • 10.­60
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­141
  • 11.­155
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­197-198
  • 11.­211
  • 11.­235
  • 11.­273
  • 12.­53
  • 13.­49
  • 13.­53
  • 13.­60
  • 13.­72
  • 14.­3
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­109
  • 14.­114
  • 14.­121
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­6
  • 15.­124
  • 15.­128
  • 15.­194
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­243
  • 17.­38
  • 24.­23-24
  • 24.­243
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­7
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­10
  • 27.­28-29
  • 27.­32
  • 27.­36-37
  • 27.­46
  • 27.­54
  • 27.­87
  • 28.­3
  • 28.­31-32
  • 28.­55
  • 29.­15
  • 29.­20
  • 30.­28
  • 30.­43
  • 30.­52
  • 31.­23
  • 31.­62
  • 32.­45
  • 33.­16
  • 33.­79
  • 33.­92-93
  • 33.­126
  • 34.­25
  • 34.­33
  • 34.­36
  • 34.­52
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­42
  • 35.­48
  • 35.­60
  • 35.­112
  • 35.­116
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­162
  • 35.­293
  • 35.­306
  • 35.­308
  • 36.­18
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­38
  • 37.­45
  • 37.­49
  • 37.­67
  • 37.­72
  • 37.­75
  • 37.­98
  • 37.­103
  • 37.­105
  • 37.­108
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­126
  • 38.­51
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­10
  • 50.­20
  • 50.­22
  • 50.­26
  • 50.­33
  • 50.­51
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­52
  • 51.­54
  • 51.­74
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­1-2
  • 52.­4
  • 52.­6-7
  • 52.­9-10
  • 52.­13
  • 52.­61
  • 52.­132
  • 52.­143-145
  • 52.­147
  • 52.­149
  • 53.­1-2
  • 53.­7
  • 53.­13
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­66
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­139
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­145
  • 53.­436
  • 53.­438
  • 53.­469
  • 53.­495
  • 53.­518
  • 53.­528
  • 53.­576
  • 53.­814
  • 53.­816
  • 53.­921
  • 53.­924
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­7-9
  • 54.­27
  • 54.­63-64
  • 54.­70-71
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­103-104
  • n.­5
  • n.­9
  • n.­26
  • n.­31
  • n.­138
  • n.­269
  • n.­271
  • n.­287
  • n.­344
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­624
  • n.­626
  • n.­681
  • n.­724-725
  • n.­732
  • n.­770
  • n.­781
  • n.­841
  • n.­908
  • n.­1013
  • n.­1330
  • n.­1530
  • n.­1643
  • n.­1692
  • n.­2007
  • n.­2089
  • n.­2252
  • n.­2326
  • n.­2432
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2500
  • n.­2508
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2541
  • n.­2598
  • n.­2608
  • n.­2748
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2825
  • n.­2999
  • n.­3134
  • n.­3229
  • n.­3320-3321
  • n.­3345-3346
  • g.­7
  • g.­34
  • g.­55
  • g.­61
  • g.­62
  • g.­72
  • g.­76
  • g.­93
  • g.­98
  • g.­101
  • g.­105
  • g.­108
  • g.­113
  • g.­117
  • g.­120
  • g.­135
  • g.­136
  • g.­145
  • g.­193
  • g.­198
  • g.­201
  • g.­206
  • g.­232
  • g.­233
  • g.­243
  • g.­272
  • g.­292
  • g.­294
  • g.­329
  • g.­333
  • g.­339
  • g.­356
  • g.­406
  • g.­460
  • g.­501
  • g.­502
  • g.­503
  • g.­505
  • g.­506
  • g.­511
  • g.­521
  • g.­525
  • g.­557
  • g.­750
  • g.­781
  • g.­782
  • g.­783
  • g.­784
  • g.­838
  • g.­846
  • g.­850
  • g.­858
  • g.­861
  • g.­868
  • g.­876
  • g.­909
  • g.­928
  • g.­930
  • g.­946
  • g.­963
  • g.­964
  • g.­992
  • g.­997
  • g.­998
  • g.­1084
  • g.­1103
  • g.­1104
  • g.­1131
  • g.­1144
  • g.­1184
  • g.­1188
  • g.­1226
  • g.­1227
  • g.­1268
  • g.­1313
  • g.­1318
  • g.­1319
  • g.­1361
  • g.­1398
  • g.­1400
  • g.­1405
  • g.­1406
  • g.­1411
  • g.­1413
  • g.­1415
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1452
  • g.­1456
  • g.­1467
  • g.­1468
  • g.­1471
  • g.­1473
  • g.­1478
  • g.­1479
  • g.­1483
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1535
  • g.­1538
  • g.­1579
  • g.­1595
  • g.­1606
  • g.­1618
  • g.­1639
  • g.­1641
  • g.­1645
  • g.­1649
  • g.­1653
  • g.­1655
  • g.­1656
  • g.­1660
  • g.­1665
  • g.­1666
  • g.­1676
  • g.­1679
  • g.­1680
  • g.­1685
  • g.­1694
  • g.­1709
  • g.­1717
  • g.­1724
  • g.­1756
  • g.­1758
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1781
  • g.­1783
  • g.­1797
  • g.­1802
  • g.­1804
  • g.­1808
  • g.­1913
  • g.­1961
  • g.­1986
  • g.­2032
  • g.­2062
  • g.­2065
  • g.­2067
  • g.­2068
  • g.­2069
  • g.­2103
  • g.­2110
  • g.­2147
g.­299

Brahmakāyika

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakāyika

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­301

Brahmapurohita

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • brahmapurohita

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­305

brahmin

Wylie:
  • bram ze
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa

A member of the priestly caste.

Located in 95 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­178
  • 3.­7
  • 4.­7
  • 11.­146
  • 15.­120
  • 15.­126
  • 24.­153
  • 24.­155
  • 25.­31
  • 26.­53
  • 27.­51
  • 27.­55
  • 28.­22
  • 28.­26
  • 28.­34
  • 32.­11
  • 37.­119
  • 51.­4
  • 53.­84
  • 53.­114
  • 53.­156
  • 53.­162
  • 53.­170
  • 53.­229
  • 53.­251
  • 53.­394
  • 53.­397
  • 53.­401
  • 53.­405-406
  • 53.­419
  • 53.­421
  • 53.­428
  • 53.­509
  • 53.­640
  • 53.­645-646
  • 53.­665-666
  • 53.­684
  • 53.­709
  • 53.­735
  • 53.­783
  • 53.­794
  • 53.­796
  • 53.­833
  • 53.­862
  • 53.­877-878
  • 53.­884
  • 53.­887-888
  • 53.­890
  • 53.­893
  • 53.­895-896
  • 53.­898-899
  • 54.­58
  • n.­518
  • n.­523
  • n.­1604
  • n.­1660
  • n.­2447
  • n.­2543
  • n.­2814
  • n.­2836
  • n.­2897
  • n.­2943
  • n.­3012-3013
  • n.­3054
  • n.­3105
  • n.­3116
  • n.­3123
  • n.­3141-3142
  • n.­3206
  • n.­3282
  • n.­3285
  • n.­3288
  • g.­575
  • g.­628
  • g.­880
  • g.­882
  • g.­1083
  • g.­1275
  • g.­1292
  • g.­1431
  • g.­1503
  • g.­1575
  • g.­1627
  • g.­1654
  • g.­1727
  • g.­2077
g.­308

Bṛhaspati

Wylie:
  • phur bu
Tibetan:
  • ཕུར་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhaspati

The planet Jupiter. The Tibetan translation phur bu reflects the Sanskrit Kīlaka, which is also a name for the planet Jupiter.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­94
  • g.­641
g.­309

Bṛhatphala

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhatphala

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­311

buddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • buddha

A fully realized (“awakened”) being; when referring to a particular buddha or tathāgata, this term is capitalized.

Located in 612 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • i.­6
  • i.­9
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16-17
  • 1.­30-31
  • 1.­33-35
  • 1.­37-38
  • 1.­40
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­72-74
  • 1.­95
  • 1.­97
  • 1.­105-107
  • 1.­109
  • 1.­118
  • 1.­120-121
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8-9
  • 2.­16-17
  • 2.­21-22
  • 2.­24-25
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­29-31
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­38
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46
  • 2.­50-59
  • 2.­61
  • 2.­63
  • 2.­65
  • 2.­67
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­82
  • 2.­86
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­92
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­141
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­187
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­196-198
  • 2.­202-204
  • 2.­207-209
  • 3.­1-2
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­9-10
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­32
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­76
  • 4.­80
  • 4.­82-83
  • 4.­112
  • 5.­6
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­8-9
  • 7.­2
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­7
  • 8.­4
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 8.­12
  • 9.­4
  • 9.­18-19
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­14-15
  • 11.­28
  • 11.­37-38
  • 11.­56
  • 11.­61
  • 11.­66
  • 11.­69
  • 11.­71
  • 11.­73
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­88
  • 11.­138
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­153
  • 11.­155
  • 11.­170
  • 11.­188-189
  • 11.­191
  • 11.­194
  • 11.­235
  • 11.­242
  • 11.­259
  • 12.­3
  • 12.­51
  • 13.­31
  • 13.­60
  • 14.­1-3
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­10
  • 14.­29
  • 14.­103-104
  • 14.­114
  • 14.­121-122
  • 14.­124-125
  • 15.­5-6
  • 15.­104
  • 15.­109
  • 15.­111
  • 15.­194-195
  • 15.­210-211
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­218
  • 15.­220
  • 15.­225
  • 15.­229
  • 15.­231
  • 15.­233
  • 15.­235-236
  • 15.­239
  • 16.­8
  • 16.­10-11
  • 16.­14
  • 16.­19
  • 16.­24
  • 16.­27-28
  • 16.­34
  • 17.­1
  • 17.­3
  • 17.­9
  • 17.­30
  • 17.­32-33
  • 17.­37
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­5-6
  • 25.­10-15
  • 25.­17
  • 25.­21
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­36-37
  • 26.­7
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­15
  • 26.­23
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­3-4
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­8
  • 27.­12
  • 27.­15
  • 27.­19
  • 27.­21
  • 27.­23-25
  • 27.­27-30
  • 27.­34
  • 27.­40
  • 27.­42
  • 27.­44
  • 27.­47
  • 27.­54
  • 27.­64
  • 27.­70-71
  • 28.­7
  • 29.­5
  • 30.­6
  • 30.­40
  • 30.­46-48
  • 30.­51
  • 31.­23-24
  • 31.­49
  • 32.­24
  • 33.­76-77
  • 33.­79
  • 33.­81
  • 33.­102
  • 33.­117
  • 34.­2-3
  • 34.­12
  • 34.­14
  • 34.­30
  • 34.­34-35
  • 34.­38
  • 34.­45
  • 34.­50
  • 35.­1-3
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­7
  • 35.­10
  • 35.­20
  • 35.­27
  • 35.­45
  • 35.­55
  • 35.­66
  • 35.­82
  • 35.­87
  • 35.­94
  • 35.­99
  • 35.­101
  • 35.­111-112
  • 35.­115
  • 35.­117-118
  • 35.­124
  • 35.­144
  • 35.­176
  • 35.­184
  • 35.­192
  • 35.­195
  • 35.­206
  • 35.­234-235
  • 35.­239-240
  • 35.­267-268
  • 35.­282
  • 35.­286
  • 35.­288-289
  • 35.­292
  • 35.­294
  • 35.­299-300
  • 35.­302
  • 35.­306-307
  • 37.­43
  • 37.­56
  • 37.­65
  • 37.­67
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­78
  • 37.­83-84
  • 37.­91-92
  • 37.­102
  • 37.­108-109
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­123
  • 38.­2-3
  • 38.­5-6
  • 38.­9
  • 38.­12
  • 38.­18
  • 38.­26
  • 38.­46
  • 38.­49
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­12
  • 50.­18
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­51
  • 51.­72
  • 52.­1
  • 52.­3-4
  • 52.­6
  • 52.­11
  • 52.­13
  • 52.­96
  • 52.­141
  • 52.­145
  • 52.­149
  • 53.­6-7
  • 53.­11
  • 53.­39
  • 53.­41
  • 53.­56
  • 53.­62
  • 53.­71
  • 53.­73
  • 53.­75
  • 53.­80
  • 53.­88
  • 53.­94
  • 53.­102-103
  • 53.­107
  • 53.­109
  • 53.­113
  • 53.­120
  • 53.­129
  • 53.­132
  • 53.­148
  • 53.­151-153
  • 53.­155-156
  • 53.­165
  • 53.­199
  • 53.­202
  • 53.­214
  • 53.­241
  • 53.­246
  • 53.­268
  • 53.­291
  • 53.­298
  • 53.­315
  • 53.­326
  • 53.­351
  • 53.­436
  • 53.­438
  • 53.­441
  • 53.­463
  • 53.­492
  • 53.­523
  • 53.­534
  • 53.­537
  • 53.­595
  • 53.­597
  • 53.­606
  • 53.­675
  • 53.­678-679
  • 53.­717
  • 53.­900
  • 53.­913
  • 54.­8
  • 54.­23-24
  • 54.­64-65
  • 54.­67
  • 54.­70-71
  • 54.­98
  • 54.­100-102
  • 54.­104
  • n.­22
  • n.­32
  • n.­122
  • n.­271
  • n.­291
  • n.­355
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­564
  • n.­568
  • n.­603
  • n.­622
  • n.­626
  • n.­662
  • n.­685
  • n.­725
  • n.­727
  • n.­733
  • n.­770
  • n.­792
  • n.­795
  • n.­805
  • n.­821
  • n.­838
  • n.­888
  • n.­911
  • n.­966
  • n.­986
  • n.­1083
  • n.­1087
  • n.­1267
  • n.­1282
  • n.­1284
  • n.­1287
  • n.­1308
  • n.­1310
  • n.­1530
  • n.­1619
  • n.­1630
  • n.­1633-1634
  • n.­1833-1834
  • n.­1836
  • n.­1892
  • n.­1972-1973
  • n.­1994
  • n.­2023-2024
  • n.­2089
  • n.­2134
  • n.­2140
  • n.­2160
  • n.­2183
  • n.­2188
  • n.­2236
  • n.­2335
  • n.­2337
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2461
  • n.­2465
  • n.­2481
  • n.­2492
  • n.­2497
  • n.­2505
  • n.­2514
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2611-2612
  • n.­2758
  • n.­2766
  • n.­2768
  • n.­2772
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2783-2785
  • n.­2795
  • n.­2797
  • n.­2802
  • n.­2805
  • n.­2811
  • n.­2827-2828
  • n.­2867
  • n.­2894
  • n.­2905
  • n.­2914
  • n.­2919
  • n.­2921
  • n.­2933
  • n.­3026
  • n.­3060
  • n.­3064
  • n.­3119
  • n.­3189
  • n.­3248
  • n.­3294
  • n.­3308-3309
  • n.­3327
  • n.­3368
  • n.­3380
  • n.­3390
  • n.­6264
  • n.­6549
  • g.­41
  • g.­50
  • g.­153
  • g.­155
  • g.­185
  • g.­225
  • g.­250
  • g.­288
  • g.­298
  • g.­312
  • g.­315
  • g.­326
  • g.­334
  • g.­350
  • g.­377
  • g.­378
  • g.­424
  • g.­433
  • g.­597
  • g.­682
  • g.­704
  • g.­705
  • g.­712
  • g.­828
  • g.­830
  • g.­885
  • g.­926
  • g.­941
  • g.­985
  • g.­996
  • g.­1013
  • g.­1060
  • g.­1072
  • g.­1163
  • g.­1229
  • g.­1236
  • g.­1246
  • g.­1251
  • g.­1296
  • g.­1348
  • g.­1365
  • g.­1386
  • g.­1388
  • g.­1443
  • g.­1453
  • g.­1514
  • g.­1543
  • g.­1548
  • g.­1574
  • g.­1591
  • g.­1603
  • g.­1605
  • g.­1616
  • g.­1642
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1763
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1781
  • g.­1782
  • g.­1818
  • g.­1819
  • g.­1889
  • g.­1895
  • g.­1911
  • g.­1912
  • g.­1915
  • g.­1928
  • g.­1999
  • g.­2001
  • g.­2044
  • g.­2049
  • g.­2118
  • g.­2151
g.­315

Budha

Wylie:
  • gza’ lhag pa
Tibetan:
  • གཟའ་ལྷག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • budha

The planet Mercury; a legendary king before the time of the Buddha; a south Indian king, the son of Śaṅkara.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­94
  • 53.­310
  • 53.­568
  • n.­3064
  • g.­1038
  • g.­1113
g.­319

cakravartin

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’ rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

Apart from the standard meaning of a universal emperor or wheel-turning monarch, this term, often along with “tathāgata,” is used as an epithet describing a class of mantra deities also referred to as “uṣṇīṣa kings.”

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8-10
  • 2.­145
  • 9.­18
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­55
  • 14.­2-5
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­2
  • 25.­8
  • 25.­13-14
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­60-61
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­42
  • 27.­44
  • 27.­56
  • 37.­17
  • 37.­31
  • 37.­53
  • 37.­68-69
  • 50.­16
  • 53.­357
  • 53.­359
  • 53.­766-767
  • n.­423
  • n.­1075
  • n.­1580
  • n.­1804
  • n.­1836
  • n.­2211
  • n.­2504
  • n.­2919
  • n.­3189-3190
  • n.­3192
  • g.­1835
  • g.­2125
g.­320

Cakravartin

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

One of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­151
  • 14.­71
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­50
  • 27.­43
  • 30.­2
  • 30.­49
  • 35.­39
  • 35.­273
  • 37.­14-15
  • 38.­17
  • 50.­13
  • 53.­357
  • n.­2212
  • n.­2283-2284
  • n.­2446
  • n.­2463
  • n.­2498
g.­325

Cancer

Wylie:
  • sbal ba
Tibetan:
  • སྦལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • karkaṭaka

See “Karkaṭaka.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­84
  • 24.­69
  • g.­693
g.­338

Capricorn

Wylie:
  • chu srin
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་སྲིན།
Sanskrit:
  • makara

See “Makara.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­85
  • n.­1422
  • g.­966
g.­351

Citrā

Wylie:
  • nag pa
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • citrā

The name of a nakṣatra.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­153
  • 24.­7
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­81
  • 24.­137
  • 24.­215
  • n.­1406-1407
  • n.­1409
g.­356

Cloud of Dharma

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • dharmamegha

The tenth level of the bodhisattva’s realization.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 4.­2
  • 8.­5
  • 10.­58
  • 14.­1
  • 15.­2
  • n.­768
g.­358

consecration

Wylie:
  • dbang
Tibetan:
  • དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • abhiṣeka

See “empowerment.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 35.­34
  • n.­3331
  • g.­487
g.­360

cubit

Wylie:
  • khru gang
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲུ་གང་།
Sanskrit:
  • hasta

A measure of length; also, an angular cubit is the measure of angular distance equal to about 2 degrees.

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­122-124
  • 2.­134
  • 2.­154
  • 3.­3
  • 4.­32
  • 7.­10
  • 7.­23
  • 11.­9
  • 11.­66
  • 11.­108
  • 11.­112
  • 13.­4
  • 13.­9
  • 13.­12
  • 13.­16
  • 14.­12
  • 14.­42
  • 15.­4
  • 24.­110
  • 26.­8
  • 26.­19
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­57
  • 27.­34
  • 28.­2
  • n.­562
  • n.­643
  • n.­785
  • n.­810
  • n.­1235
  • g.­131
  • g.­2157
g.­381

destiny

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • gati

Any of the five or six types of rebirth.

Located in 37 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­24
  • 5.­14
  • 11.­78
  • 11.­86
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­111
  • 14.­133
  • 15.­191
  • 15.­195
  • 16.­5
  • 16.­30
  • 24.­35
  • 29.­2-3
  • 30.­48
  • 31.­22
  • 32.­9
  • 32.­24
  • 35.­65
  • 35.­298
  • 35.­305
  • 37.­74
  • 38.­37
  • 51.­78
  • 53.­10
  • 53.­235
  • 53.­288
  • 53.­358
  • 53.­410
  • 53.­765
  • n.­816
  • n.­1265
  • n.­1835
  • n.­1884-1885
  • n.­2777
  • n.­3323
g.­397

Dhanus

Wylie:
  • gzhu
Tibetan:
  • གཞུ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhanus

Sagittarius (zodiac sign and constellation); also the name of an ancient king.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • 53.­551
  • g.­1368
g.­404

dharmadhātu

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbying
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབྱིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhātu

See “sphere of phenomena.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7
  • 54.­99
  • n.­1500
  • n.­3380-3381
  • g.­1540
g.­443

divine youth

Wylie:
  • gzhon nu
Tibetan:
  • གཞོན་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāra

See “kumāra.”

Located in 223 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­6-7
  • 1.­9-12
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16
  • 1.­18-19
  • 1.­21-22
  • 1.­32
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­67
  • 1.­69
  • 1.­72-73
  • 1.­106-109
  • 1.­118
  • 1.­121
  • 1.­123
  • 2.­1-4
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8-9
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­49
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­104
  • 2.­106-111
  • 2.­117
  • 2.­119
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­147
  • 2.­163
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­184
  • 2.­194
  • 2.­208
  • 2.­211
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­11
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­68-69
  • 4.­93
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­4
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­12
  • 8.­1-2
  • 9.­1-2
  • 11.­1-3
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­191
  • 12.­1-3
  • 12.­52
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­52
  • 15.­5
  • 15.­105
  • 15.­108
  • 15.­225
  • 15.­233
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­20
  • 16.­33-34
  • 24.­40
  • 25.­2
  • 26.­1
  • 27.­1-2
  • 27.­29
  • 27.­31
  • 27.­38
  • 27.­44
  • 28.­1-2
  • 28.­5
  • 28.­8
  • 28.­11-12
  • 28.­24
  • 28.­27-29
  • 28.­33
  • 29.­1
  • 29.­3
  • 29.­6
  • 29.­11
  • 30.­1
  • 30.­48
  • 31.­1-3
  • 31.­60
  • 32.­1
  • 32.­4
  • 33.­1
  • 33.­82
  • 34.­1-2
  • 34.­31
  • 34.­33
  • 34.­44
  • 34.­47
  • 35.­2-3
  • 35.­5-6
  • 35.­298-299
  • 35.­302
  • 36.­1
  • 37.­1-2
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­107-108
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­115
  • 37.­124
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­5
  • 38.­10
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­37
  • 53.­138
  • 53.­141
  • 53.­144
  • 53.­149
  • 53.­154
  • 53.­300
  • 53.­321
  • 53.­329
  • 53.­377
  • 53.­416-417
  • 53.­511
  • 53.­517
  • 53.­560
  • 53.­811
  • 53.­856
  • 53.­880
  • 53.­883
  • 53.­921
  • 54.­1
  • 54.­3
  • 54.­7
  • 54.­43
  • 54.­48
  • 54.­59
  • 54.­62
  • 54.­65-66
  • 54.­68
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­99-100
  • 54.­104
  • n.­5
  • n.­99
  • n.­287
  • n.­292
  • n.­357
  • n.­457
  • n.­595
  • n.­781
  • n.­1028
  • n.­1309
  • n.­1702
  • n.­1707
  • n.­1776
  • n.­1875
  • n.­1879
  • n.­2020-2021
  • n.­2023
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2820
  • n.­3014
  • n.­3260
  • n.­3277
  • n.­3332
  • n.­3334
  • n.­3381
  • g.­791
g.­486

emblem

Wylie:
  • phyag rgya
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱག་རྒྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • mudrā

See “mudrā.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92
  • 2.­144
  • 2.­159
  • 2.­172
  • 4.­87
  • g.­1052
g.­487

empowerment

Wylie:
  • dbang
Tibetan:
  • དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • abhiṣeka

Literally “sprinkling,” abhiṣeka is a ritual consecration that often functions as a deity empowerment. The term is also translated in this text as “initiation.”

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­196-197
  • 2.­199-204
  • 2.­206
  • 11.­4
  • 11.­6
  • 11.­23
  • 25.­2
  • 37.­21
  • n.­492
  • n.­1488
  • g.­358
  • g.­607
g.­488

eon

Wylie:
  • bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A cosmic period of time, sometimes equivalent to the time when a world system appears, exists, and disappears. According to the traditional Abhidharma understanding of cyclical time, a great eon (mahākalpa) is divided into eighty lesser eons. In the course of one great eon, the universe takes form and later disappears. During the first twenty of the lesser eons, the universe is in the process of creation and expansion; during the next twenty it remains; during the third twenty, it is in the process of destruction; and during the last quarter of the cycle, it remains in a state of empty stasis. A fortunate, or good, eon (bhadrakalpa) refers to any eon in which more than one buddha appears.

Located in 98 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­31
  • 1.­44
  • 2.­18
  • 4.­106
  • 4.­111
  • 5.­20
  • 6.­7
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­53
  • 11.­239
  • 11.­241
  • 12.­23
  • 14.­100
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­33
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­18
  • 24.­24
  • 24.­39
  • 24.­120
  • 24.­207
  • 25.­23
  • 25.­37
  • 26.­18
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­52
  • 27.­3
  • 27.­20
  • 27.­22
  • 28.­41-42
  • 28.­46
  • 28.­53
  • 29.­2
  • 32.­33
  • 32.­35
  • 33.­79
  • 34.­37-38
  • 34.­44-45
  • 34.­49
  • 37.­30
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­125
  • 50.­3
  • 52.­95
  • 53.­58-59
  • 53.­96
  • 53.­152
  • 53.­217-219
  • 53.­221
  • 53.­226
  • 53.­255
  • 53.­309
  • 53.­317
  • 53.­366
  • 53.­376
  • 53.­380
  • 53.­424
  • 53.­447
  • 53.­484
  • 53.­492
  • 53.­520
  • 53.­564
  • 53.­587
  • 53.­769
  • 53.­779
  • 53.­823
  • 53.­834-836
  • 53.­854
  • 53.­857
  • 53.­866
  • 54.­31
  • 54.­85
  • n.­603
  • n.­621
  • n.­753
  • n.­1240
  • n.­1432
  • n.­1977
  • n.­2020
  • n.­2710
  • n.­2870
  • n.­2928
  • n.­2934
  • n.­3207
  • g.­374
  • g.­475
  • g.­491
  • g.­540
  • g.­608
  • g.­877
g.­497

four great kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal po chen po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturmahārāja

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Four gods who live on the lower slopes (fourth level) of Mount Meru in the eponymous Heaven of the Four Great Kings (Cāturmahā­rājika, rgyal chen bzhi’i ris) and guard the four cardinal directions. Each is the leader of a nonhuman class of beings living in his realm. They are Dhṛtarāṣṭra, ruling the gandharvas in the east; Virūḍhaka, ruling over the kumbhāṇḍas in the south; Virūpākṣa, ruling the nāgas in the west; and Vaiśravaṇa (also known as Kubera) ruling the yakṣas in the north. Also referred to as Guardians of the World or World Protectors (lokapāla, ’jig rten skyong ba).

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­158
  • 2.­172
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­50
  • 53.­901
  • n.­3258
  • g.­414
  • g.­786
  • g.­2089
  • g.­2092
g.­515

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­171
  • 2.­209
  • 11.­127
  • 12.­15
  • 15.­86
  • 24.­22
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­30
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­9
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­53
  • 37.­39-40
  • 37.­73
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­233
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­104
  • n.­1372
  • n.­1873
  • n.­2323
  • n.­2370
  • n.­2859
  • n.­3312
  • g.­414
  • g.­497
  • g.­517
  • g.­1160
g.­518

Gaṅgā

Wylie:
  • sI ta
  • gang gA
Tibetan:
  • སཱི་ཏ།
  • གང་གཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gaṅgā, or Ganges in English, is considered to be the most sacred river of India, particularly within the Hindu tradition. It starts in the Himalayas, flows through the northern plains of India, bathing the holy city of Vārāṇasī, and meets the sea at the Bay of Bengal, in Bangladesh. In the sūtras, however, this river is mostly mentioned not for its sacredness but for its abundant sands‍—noticeable still today on its many sandy banks and at its delta‍—which serve as a common metaphor for infinitely large numbers.

According to Buddhist cosmology, as explained in the Abhidharmakośa, it is one of the four rivers that flow from Lake Anavatapta and cross the southern continent of Jambudvīpa‍—the known human world or more specifically the Indian subcontinent.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­35
  • 4.­112
  • 9.­15
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­3
  • 10.­8
  • 10.­41
  • 10.­52
  • 14.­1
  • 24.­143
  • 24.­230
  • 24.­232
  • 27.­3
  • 31.­53-54
  • 33.­77
  • 52.­107
  • 53.­19
  • 53.­620
  • 53.­627
  • 53.­650
  • 53.­681
  • 53.­696
  • 53.­699
  • 53.­712-713
  • 53.­813
  • 53.­837
  • 54.­22
  • n.­718
  • n.­729
  • n.­731
  • n.­743
  • n.­1873
  • g.­240
  • g.­950
g.­522

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­86
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­98-100
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­164
  • 2.­209
  • 14.­76
  • 24.­22
  • 25.­13
  • 31.­33
  • 32.­38
  • 52.­123
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­907
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­104
  • n.­351
  • g.­49
  • g.­247
  • g.­411
  • g.­523
  • g.­922
  • g.­1002
  • g.­1154
  • g.­1167
  • g.­1168
  • g.­1175
  • g.­1382
  • g.­1626
  • g.­1686
  • g.­1725
  • g.­1749
  • g.­1908
  • g.­1909
g.­527

Gautama

Wylie:
  • gau ta ma
Tibetan:
  • གཽ་ཏ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gautama

One of the sages (ṛṣi).

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83
  • 31.­3
  • 53.­180
  • g.­1386
g.­530

Gemini

Wylie:
  • sbyor ba
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • mithuna

See “Mithuna.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­84
  • 24.­67
  • n.­1398
  • g.­1045
g.­548

graha

Wylie:
  • gdon
  • gza’
Tibetan:
  • གདོན།
  • གཟའ།
Sanskrit:
  • graha

A class of nonhuman beings able to enter and possess the human body; a class of beings, such as Rāhu, that cause solar and lunar eclipses; a planet (this category includes the sun and the moon but excludes the earth); a planet or planetary influence personified.

Located in 108 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­93
  • 1.­95
  • 2.­82-83
  • 2.­164
  • 9.­13
  • 11.­128
  • 14.­166
  • 24.­1
  • 24.­3
  • 24.­35
  • 24.­222
  • 24.­224
  • 25.­7
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­31
  • 26.­40
  • 30.­18
  • 31.­45
  • 31.­55
  • 32.­38
  • 33.­99
  • 35.­81
  • 35.­102
  • 35.­134
  • 35.­143
  • 35.­171
  • 35.­201
  • 36.­11
  • 36.­13
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­122
  • 50.­6
  • 51.­52
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­830
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­39
  • n.­435
  • n.­1231
  • n.­1362
  • n.­1479
  • n.­2086
  • n.­2250
  • n.­2490-2491
  • n.­2620
  • n.­2860
  • n.­2935
  • n.­3152
  • n.­3156
  • g.­11
  • g.­13
  • g.­144
  • g.­164
  • g.­219
  • g.­417
  • g.­420
  • g.­423
  • g.­425
  • g.­469
  • g.­534
  • g.­587
  • g.­588
  • g.­736
  • g.­761
  • g.­774
  • g.­792
  • g.­852
  • g.­878
  • g.­961
  • g.­1019
  • g.­1022
  • g.­1024
  • g.­1099
  • g.­1100
  • g.­1101
  • g.­1102
  • g.­1126
  • g.­1208
  • g.­1214
  • g.­1232
  • g.­1329
  • g.­1342
  • g.­1350
  • g.­1437
  • g.­1446
  • g.­1529
  • g.­1532
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1757
  • g.­1762
  • g.­1803
  • g.­1850
  • g.­1878
  • g.­1882
  • g.­1924
  • g.­2047
  • g.­2082
  • g.­2090
  • g.­2116
  • g.­2149
  • g.­2158
g.­563

guhyaka

Wylie:
  • gsang ba pa
Tibetan:
  • གསང་བ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • guhyaka

A subclass of yakṣas, but much of the time used as an alternative name for yakṣas.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­110-111
  • 2.­118-119
  • 2.­188
  • 50.­8
  • 51.­1
  • 52.­14
  • 52.­80
  • 53.­347
  • n.­2696
  • g.­566
g.­594

Himalayas

Wylie:
  • kha ba can
Tibetan:
  • ཁ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • himavat

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­12
  • 24.­138
  • 24.­231
  • 30.­5
  • 30.­7
  • 30.­14
  • 31.­53
  • 34.­51
  • 53.­14
  • 53.­20
  • 53.­364
  • 53.­752
  • 53.­754
  • 53.­756
  • 53.­837
  • n.­563
  • n.­1814
  • n.­1873
  • g.­719
  • g.­1985
g.­598

homa

Wylie:
  • sbyin sreg
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱིན་སྲེག
Sanskrit:
  • homa

A fire sacrifice where the practitioner offers an oblation a specified number of times; when this term refers to an individual oblation, it has been translated as “oblation.”

Located in 85 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­117
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­29
  • 10.­50
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­159
  • 11.­273
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­12
  • 13.­15-16
  • 13.­29
  • 13.­44-45
  • 13.­50
  • 13.­53
  • 13.­55
  • 13.­58-59
  • 13.­68
  • 14.­66
  • 14.­70
  • 14.­94
  • 14.­97
  • 14.­108
  • 14.­171
  • 14.­176
  • 14.­178-180
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­4
  • 15.­6
  • 15.­227
  • 24.­186
  • 24.­200
  • 25.­2
  • 25.­27
  • 25.­30-31
  • 26.­21
  • 26.­24-25
  • 26.­28
  • 27.­48
  • 27.­50
  • 27.­52
  • 27.­55-56
  • 27.­82
  • 27.­85
  • 28.­9
  • 28.­12
  • 28.­17
  • 28.­21
  • 28.­34
  • 34.­28
  • 35.­70
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­173
  • 35.­261
  • 36.­16
  • 37.­22
  • 37.­25
  • 51.­33
  • 51.­61-62
  • 51.­66
  • 54.­98
  • n.­996
  • n.­1014
  • n.­1128
  • n.­1489
  • n.­1570
  • n.­1572
  • n.­1682
  • n.­2562
  • n.­2629
  • g.­1134
g.­602

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra

The god Indra; Indra is often referred to by the epithet Śakra; when used in the plural it refers to a class of gods; The name of an ancient Buddhist king; one of the Buddhist mleccha kings.

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­10
  • 26.­60
  • 30.­25
  • 33.­34
  • 53.­551
  • 53.­580
  • 53.­707
  • 54.­54
  • 54.­62
  • n.­1940
  • n.­2786
  • n.­3335
  • n.­3337-3338
  • n.­3341-3342
  • n.­3344
  • n.­5224
  • g.­717
  • g.­887
  • g.­1273
  • g.­1380
  • g.­1424
  • g.­1596
  • g.­2011
  • g.­2130
g.­607

initiation

Wylie:
  • dbang
Tibetan:
  • དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • abhiṣeka

See “empowerment.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­20
  • 14.­36
  • 35.­34
  • g.­487
g.­623

Jangchub O

Wylie:
  • byang chub ’od
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • (not in the skt. source of the mmk)

The nephew of Lha Lama Yeshe O, a king of the Yarlung imperial Tibetan line who ruled in the Western Tibetan kingdom of Gugé. Jangchub O is famously remembered for inviting the Indian teacher Atiśa to come to Tibet on his uncle’s orders. He was likely born in the early 11th century.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • c.­1
g.­641

Jupiter

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhaspati

See “Bṛhaspati.”

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­73
  • 15.­154
  • 15.­159
  • 15.­161
  • 15.­173
  • 24.­50
  • 24.­60
  • 24.­70
  • 24.­92
  • 24.­104
  • 24.­116
  • 24.­186
  • n.­1236
  • n.­1400
  • n.­1411
  • g.­308
g.­686

Kanyā

Wylie:
  • bu mo
Tibetan:
  • བུ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanyā

Virgo (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • n.­3791
  • g.­2088
g.­693

Karkaṭaka

Wylie:
  • sbal ba
Tibetan:
  • སྦལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • karkaṭaka

Cancer (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • g.­325
g.­695

karma

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karman

Karmic accumulation, positive or negative, that will produce results in the future, unless it is purified. This term is also translated in other instances as “activity” or “rite.” In these latter cases the term refers to a ritual activity (such as pacifying, nourishing, etc.) or a rite meant to accomplish such activity.

Located in 118 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • 4.­17
  • 4.­106
  • 5.­13
  • 6.­7-8
  • 7.­7
  • 11.­78
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­248-249
  • 11.­270-271
  • 15.­87-88
  • 15.­180
  • 17.­3-5
  • 17.­10
  • 17.­12-16
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­20
  • 17.­38
  • 24.­15
  • 24.­17
  • 24.­34
  • 24.­38
  • 24.­46
  • 24.­235
  • 27.­72-79
  • 27.­83-84
  • 27.­86
  • 28.­17
  • 28.­51
  • 29.­19
  • 31.­2
  • 33.­47
  • 33.­95
  • 53.­283
  • 53.­287-289
  • 53.­354
  • 53.­389
  • 53.­402-403
  • 53.­408
  • 53.­413
  • 53.­423
  • 53.­426
  • 53.­435
  • 53.­447
  • 53.­496
  • 53.­536
  • 53.­630
  • 53.­639
  • 53.­664
  • 53.­670
  • 53.­705
  • 53.­707
  • 53.­740
  • 53.­743
  • 53.­747
  • 53.­749
  • 53.­762
  • n.­621
  • n.­817
  • n.­937
  • n.­954
  • n.­1175-1179
  • n.­1233
  • n.­1253
  • n.­1335-1337
  • n.­1343
  • n.­1381
  • n.­1384
  • n.­1424
  • n.­1485
  • n.­1676
  • n.­1679
  • n.­1880
  • n.­1888
  • n.­1986
  • n.­3130
  • n.­3159
  • n.­3170
  • n.­3175
  • n.­3354
  • n.­4756
  • n.­4993
  • n.­5150
  • n.­5178
  • n.­5389
  • n.­5809
  • n.­6777
  • g.­25
  • g.­700
  • g.­762
  • g.­1341
g.­727

Ketu

Wylie:
  • mjug ring
Tibetan:
  • མཇུག་རིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ketu

Comet personified.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­94
  • 15.­163
  • 15.­167
  • n.­1238
g.­728

Ketu

Wylie:
  • tog
Tibetan:
  • ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ketu

One of the tathāgatas attending the delivery of the MMK; one of the eight pratyeka­buddhas; also, the name of an ancient king.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­60
  • 4.­82
  • 11.­196
  • 53.­551
  • n.­585
  • n.­1238
  • n.­3480
  • n.­3632
g.­747

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མིའམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnara

A class of semidivine beings, half human and half horse, or half human and half bird.

Located in 41 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­88
  • 1.­90
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­171
  • 2.­209
  • 11.­127
  • 12.­15
  • 14.­76
  • 25.­13
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­44
  • 31.­34
  • 53.­124
  • 53.­233
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­908
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­104
  • g.­100
  • g.­163
  • g.­354
  • g.­450
  • g.­531
  • g.­707
  • g.­748
  • g.­825
  • g.­836
  • g.­920
  • g.­953
  • g.­955
  • g.­960
  • g.­1004
  • g.­1614
  • g.­1719
  • g.­1836
  • g.­1839
  • g.­1846
  • g.­1884
  • g.­2094
g.­752

knowledge holder

Wylie:
  • rig ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རིག་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyādhara

See “vidyādhara.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­12
  • 4.­30
  • 25.­2
  • g.­2039
g.­760

kravyāda

Wylie:
  • sha rjen
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་རྗེན།
Sanskrit:
  • kravyāda

“Carrion eater,” a class of flesh-eating spirits.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­166
  • 15.­186
  • 35.­117
  • 35.­143
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­122
  • 51.­41
  • 51.­71
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­48
  • n.­1259
g.­762

kriyā

Wylie:
  • mdzad pa
Tibetan:
  • མཛད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kriyā

A mere ritual performance (in contradistinction to karman, which is the same performance aiming at a particular outcome). The term is also used to denote a class of tantras, the Kriyā tantras.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1-2
  • i.­5
  • i.­8
  • 11.­249
  • n.­937
  • n.­2435
  • g.­1764
g.­765

krodharāja

Wylie:
  • khro rgyal
  • khro rgyal chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ།
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • krodharāja

“Lord of wrath.” In the MMK this term seems to refer in some cases to a whole class of divine beings, which can perhaps be regarded as the wrathful vidyārājas. “Lord of Wrath” elsewhere is an epithet of Yamāntaka.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­52
  • 35.­161
  • n.­88-89
  • n.­98
  • n.­3925
  • g.­763
  • g.­874
g.­770

Kṛttikā

Wylie:
  • smin drug
Tibetan:
  • སྨིན་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • kṛttikā

The name of a nakṣatra.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­153
  • 24.­4
  • 24.­49
  • 24.­52
  • 24.­131
  • 24.­212
  • n.­1389
g.­773

kṣatriya

Wylie:
  • rgyal rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣatriya

A member of the warrior and administrative caste.

Located in 38 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­178-179
  • 2.­193
  • 4.­7
  • 15.­126
  • 24.­155
  • 27.­55
  • 28.­22
  • 28.­26
  • 28.­34
  • 53.­323
  • 53.­326
  • 53.­328
  • 53.­658
  • 53.­688
  • 53.­693
  • 53.­698
  • 53.­712-713
  • 53.­752
  • 53.­756
  • 53.­759
  • 53.­763
  • 53.­774
  • 53.­779
  • 53.­789
  • 53.­802
  • 54.­50
  • n.­1205
  • n.­2897
  • n.­3126
  • n.­3157
  • n.­3159
  • n.­3182-3183
  • n.­3206
  • n.­3222
  • n.­3331
g.­786

Kubera

Wylie:
  • lus ngan po
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་ངན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kubera

The god of wealth and the king of the yakṣas; one of the four great kings of the directions.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 6.­10
  • 15.­160
  • 26.­28
  • 37.­74
  • n.­1824
  • n.­1895
  • n.­2467
  • n.­2658
  • n.­2726
  • n.­2980
  • n.­3295
  • g.­69
  • g.­391
  • g.­990
  • g.­1919
  • g.­2128
g.­791

kumāra

Wylie:
  • gzhon nu
Tibetan:
  • གཞོན་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāra

Apart from the usual meaning and usages (such as being a title of Mañjuśrī, etc.), this also seems to be the name of a class of nonhuman beings. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “divine youth.”

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­381
  • n.­292-293
  • n.­338
  • n.­2935
  • n.­3261
  • n.­3332
  • n.­3772
  • g.­443
  • g.­795
g.­793

Kumārakalaśa

Wylie:
  • ku mA ra ka la sha
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་མཱ་ར་ཀ་ལ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumārakalaśa

The name of an Indian preceptor and teacher who lived during the early Sarma (gsar ma) period (c. 11th century) and worked on the Tibetan translation of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­tantra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­796

Kumbha

Wylie:
  • bum pa
Tibetan:
  • བུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbha

One of the kings of rākṣasas; Aquarius (the zodiac sign and the constellation); a south Indian king contemporary with Mahendra.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­77
  • 1.­98
  • 53.­568
  • g.­148
g.­805

kuśa grass

Wylie:
  • ku sha
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśa

Poa cynosuroides, a species of grass commonly used in religious ceremonies.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­126
  • 2.­137
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­182
  • 2.­199-200
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­64
  • 7.­11
  • 8.­8
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­52
  • 11.­58
  • 11.­156
  • 11.­158
  • 12.­49
  • 13.­15
  • 13.­22
  • 15.­6
  • 25.­26
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­47
  • 28.­7
  • 28.­28
  • 52.­72
  • 52.­87
  • n.­380-381
  • n.­1506
g.­826

Leo

Wylie:
  • seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha

See “Siṃha.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­84
  • 24.­74
  • g.­1513
g.­827

Libra

Wylie:
  • srang
Tibetan:
  • སྲང་།
Sanskrit:
  • tula

See “Tula.”

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­85
  • 24.­82
  • n.­1408-1413
  • g.­1811
g.­828

Licchavi

Wylie:
  • lits+tsha vI
Tibetan:
  • ལིཙྪ་བཱི༹།
Sanskrit:
  • licchavi

A clan and a dynasty of kings contemporary with the Buddha; also the name of a Nepalese dynasty ca. fifth to eighth centuries ᴄᴇ.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­324
  • 53.­501
  • n.­3005
  • n.­3009
  • g.­983
  • g.­1514
  • g.­1915
g.­872

looks upon

Wylie:
  • spyan
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • paśyati

A technical astrological expression indicating that the aspect of the planet that “looks” is exercising influence on the planet it looks upon, and, indirectly, also on the affected person.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­159
  • 15.­162
  • 24.­49
  • n.­1391
g.­874

lord of wrath

Wylie:
  • khro rgyal
  • khro rgyal chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ།
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • krodharāja

See “krodharāja.”

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­125
  • 4.­86
  • 50.­2-3
  • 52.­41
  • 52.­148
  • n.­2535
  • g.­765
g.­875

Lord of Wrath

Wylie:
  • khro bo’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་བོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • krodharāja

Epithet of Yamāntaka; also the namesake mantra.

Located in 70 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­73
  • 1.­80
  • 1.­109-110
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­6-8
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­122
  • 2.­125
  • 2.­138-139
  • 2.­148-149
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­94
  • 5.­9
  • 6.­4
  • 15.­105-107
  • 15.­109
  • 35.­81
  • 50.­35-36
  • 50.­38
  • 50.­41
  • 50.­48
  • 50.­50
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­34
  • 51.­51
  • 51.­56
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­8
  • 52.­14-15
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­23
  • 52.­42
  • 52.­115-116
  • 52.­124-125
  • 52.­128-129
  • 52.­135
  • 52.­138
  • 52.­148-149
  • 53.­885
  • n.­278
  • n.­377
  • n.­1189
  • n.­2502
  • n.­2509
  • n.­2520
  • n.­2524
  • n.­2538
  • n.­2610
  • n.­2630
  • n.­2729-2730
  • n.­2738
  • n.­2741
  • n.­2842
  • g.­765
g.­877

lowest eon

Wylie:
  • dus kyi tha mar
Tibetan:
  • དུས་ཀྱི་ཐ་མར།
Sanskrit:
  • yugādhama

The least auspicious in the cycle of four eons.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­11
  • 24.­10
  • 24.­12
  • 24.­40
  • 24.­43
  • 25.­5
  • 25.­13
  • 26.­2
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­28
  • 27.­30
  • 28.­1
  • 32.­25
  • 32.­41
  • 34.­40
  • 53.­230
  • 53.­574
  • 53.­585
g.­885

Magadha

Wylie:
  • ma ga dhA
Tibetan:
  • མ་ག་དྷཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • magadha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ancient Indian kingdom that lay to the south of the Ganges River in what today is the state of Bihar. Magadha was the largest of the sixteen “great states” (mahājanapada) that flourished between the sixth and third centuries ʙᴄᴇ in northern India. During the life of the Buddha Śākyamuni, it was ruled by King Bimbisāra and later by Bimbisāra's son, Ajātaśatru. Its capital was initially Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir) but was later moved to Pāṭaliputra (modern-day Patna). Over the centuries, with the expansion of the Magadha’s might, it became the capital of the vast Mauryan empire and seat of the great King Aśoka.

This region is home to many of the most important Buddhist sites, including Bodh Gayā, where the Buddha attained awakening; Vulture Peak (Gṛdhra­kūṭa), where the Buddha bestowed many well-known Mahāyāna sūtras; and the Buddhist university of Nālandā that flourished between the fifth and twelfth centuries ᴄᴇ, among many others.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­149-150
  • 24.­216
  • 24.­219
  • 24.­226
  • 30.­10
  • 31.­32
  • 53.­111
  • 53.­299
  • 53.­394
  • 53.­646
  • 53.­692
  • 53.­700
  • 53.­711
  • 53.­753
  • n.­1857
  • n.­2937
  • n.­3108
  • n.­3202
  • n.­3283
  • n.­6452
  • g.­50
  • g.­288
  • g.­401
  • g.­418
  • g.­806
  • g.­1182
  • g.­1240
  • g.­1435
  • g.­1824
  • g.­1923
g.­886

Maghā

Wylie:
  • mchu
Tibetan:
  • མཆུ།
Sanskrit:
  • maghā

The name of a nakṣatra.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­153
  • 24.­7
  • 24.­74
  • 24.­129
  • 24.­214
g.­893

Mahābrahmā

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahmā

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 38.­21
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­1
g.­905

Mahākrodha

Wylie:
  • khro bo chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་བོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākrodha

A vidyārāja from the personal retinue of Vajrapāṇi; an epithet of Yamāntaka; an epithet of Yamāri; the name of a boar-faced emanation of Mañjuśrī.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 15.­99
  • n.­3284
g.­942

Mahendra

Wylie:
  • dbang chen
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahendra

Identified as Mahendravarman I of Kāñci, a Pallava king of the early seventh century; this name is shared also by the Khmer king Mahendravarman.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­566-567
  • 53.­572
  • g.­329
  • g.­509
  • g.­545
  • g.­796
  • g.­917
  • g.­1025
  • g.­1216
  • g.­1264
  • g.­1440
  • g.­1664
  • g.­1988
g.­958

mahoraga

Wylie:
  • brang ’gro chen po
Tibetan:
  • བྲང་འགྲོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahoraga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally “great serpents,” mahoragas are supernatural beings depicted as large, subterranean beings with human torsos and heads and the lower bodies of serpents. Their movements are said to cause earthquakes, and they make up a class of subterranean geomantic spirits whose movement through the seasons and months of the year is deemed significant for construction projects.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­84
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­209
  • 6.­11
  • 10.­6
  • 14.­76
  • 25.­13
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­33
  • 37.­74
  • 53.­207
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­104
  • g.­261
  • g.­262
  • g.­439
  • g.­1014
  • g.­1015
  • g.­1020
  • g.­1611
g.­966

Makara

Wylie:
  • chu srin
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་སྲིན།
Sanskrit:
  • makara

Capricorn (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • n.­3638
  • g.­338
g.­984

maṇḍala

Wylie:
  • dkyil ’khor
Tibetan:
  • དཀྱིལ་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇḍala

Literally a “disk” or “circle,” in the ritual context maṇḍala is a sacred space on the ground or a raised platform, arranged according to a pattern that varies from rite to rite.

Located in 220 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 1.­71
  • 1.­109
  • 2.­2-3
  • 2.­5
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­107-109
  • 2.­112-113
  • 2.­117-119
  • 2.­121
  • 2.­123-127
  • 2.­129
  • 2.­131-134
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­148
  • 2.­150
  • 2.­153-154
  • 2.­159
  • 2.­163
  • 2.­165-169
  • 2.­172-179
  • 2.­181
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­191-194
  • 2.­196-200
  • 2.­202-203
  • 2.­206-207
  • 2.­209-211
  • 3.­1-4
  • 3.­6-8
  • 3.­10-11
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­40
  • 4.­76
  • 9.­1
  • 11.­4-9
  • 11.­22
  • 11.­107-111
  • 11.­154
  • 11.­202
  • 12.­40
  • 14.­7-8
  • 14.­34
  • 14.­36-37
  • 14.­41-42
  • 14.­44
  • 14.­62-63
  • 14.­72
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­224
  • 24.­182-183
  • 24.­185
  • 25.­2
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­40
  • 33.­118
  • 34.­2
  • 35.­130
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­269
  • 36.­16
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­29
  • 37.­58
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­8
  • 38.­14
  • 38.­16-19
  • 38.­24-26
  • 38.­30-32
  • 38.­35
  • 38.­37-38
  • 38.­41
  • 38.­51
  • 52.­44
  • 52.­71
  • 52.­146
  • n.­9
  • n.­319
  • n.­357
  • n.­362
  • n.­370
  • n.­376
  • n.­378
  • n.­380
  • n.­391
  • n.­401
  • n.­420
  • n.­430
  • n.­436-437
  • n.­445-449
  • n.­453
  • n.­473
  • n.­486-487
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­504-505
  • n.­507
  • n.­537
  • n.­583
  • n.­838
  • n.­840
  • n.­912
  • n.­1044
  • n.­1047
  • n.­1049
  • n.­1051
  • n.­1053
  • n.­1076
  • n.­1454
  • n.­1488
  • n.­1718
  • n.­1995
  • n.­2101
  • n.­2108
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2456-2457
  • n.­2474
  • n.­2613
  • n.­2662
  • n.­3231
  • g.­55
  • g.­328
  • g.­512
  • g.­861
  • g.­902
  • g.­1314
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1534
  • g.­1572
  • g.­1765
  • g.­1876
  • g.­1899
  • g.­1974
g.­997

Mañjughoṣa

Wylie:
  • ’jam pa’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་པའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjughoṣa
  • mañjusvara

“One with a sweet voice,” an epithet of the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī. The name is also written as “Mañjusvara.”

Located in 84 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­5
  • 2.­54
  • 2.­73
  • 2.­90-91
  • 2.­105
  • 2.­117
  • 2.­132
  • 2.­177
  • 4.­93
  • 5.­14
  • 11.­13
  • 14.­41
  • 15.­107
  • 15.­225
  • 15.­233
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­41-42
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­36
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­11
  • 27.­19
  • 27.­25-26
  • 28.­54
  • 30.­3
  • 30.­47
  • 31.­18
  • 32.­43
  • 33.­84-85
  • 35.­40
  • 35.­53
  • 35.­73
  • 35.­116-117
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­179
  • 35.­218
  • 35.­278
  • 35.­293
  • 35.­302
  • 38.­5
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­37
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­131
  • 52.­140
  • 52.­143-144
  • 53.­55
  • 53.­57
  • 53.­138
  • 53.­143-144
  • 53.­151
  • 53.­441
  • 53.­499
  • 53.­518
  • 53.­576-577
  • 53.­826
  • 53.­851
  • 53.­885
  • 54.­32
  • 54.­49
  • 54.­82
  • n.­595
  • n.­1046
  • n.­1286
  • n.­1312
  • n.­1314
  • n.­1623
  • n.­1627
  • n.­1640
  • n.­2493-2494
  • n.­2747
  • n.­2969
  • n.­3070
  • n.­6163
  • g.­999
g.­998

Mañjuśrī

Wylie:
  • ’jam dpal
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjuśrī
  • mañju

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Mañjuśrī is one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha” and a bodhisattva who embodies wisdom. He is a major figure in the Mahāyāna sūtras, appearing often as an interlocutor of the Buddha. In his most well-known iconographic form, he is portrayed bearing the sword of wisdom in his right hand and a volume of the Prajñā­pāramitā­sūtra in his left. To his name, Mañjuśrī, meaning “Gentle and Glorious One,” is often added the epithet Kumārabhūta, “having a youthful form.” He is also called Mañjughoṣa, Mañjusvara, and Pañcaśikha.

Located in 423 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1-3
  • i.­9
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­6-7
  • 1.­9-10
  • 1.­12
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16-19
  • 1.­21-22
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­32-33
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­67-69
  • 1.­72-73
  • 1.­106-109
  • 1.­111
  • 1.­118
  • 1.­121
  • 1.­123
  • 2.­1-4
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­10
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­20-21
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­49-50
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­87
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­92
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­98
  • 2.­106-111
  • 2.­118-119
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­147
  • 2.­149
  • 2.­153
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­168
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­194
  • 2.­199
  • 2.­207-208
  • 2.­211
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­3
  • 3.­11
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­55
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­76
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­85-87
  • 4.­116
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­7-9
  • 5.­21
  • 6.­1
  • 6.­3-5
  • 6.­13
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­15
  • 7.­17-23
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­1-2
  • 8.­5
  • 8.­11-12
  • 9.­1-2
  • 9.­19-22
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­57-58
  • 10.­60
  • 11.­1-3
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­20
  • 11.­153-154
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­192
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­273
  • 12.­1-3
  • 12.­53
  • 13.­1-2
  • 13.­72
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­99
  • 15.­105
  • 15.­243
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­13
  • 16.­24
  • 16.­32
  • 16.­34
  • 16.­36
  • 17.­38
  • 24.­243
  • 25.­2
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­1-3
  • 27.­18
  • 27.­29
  • 27.­38
  • 27.­44
  • 27.­87
  • 28.­1-2
  • 28.­4
  • 28.­8-9
  • 28.­11-12
  • 28.­24
  • 28.­27-28
  • 28.­32
  • 28.­36-39
  • 28.­43-44
  • 28.­55
  • 29.­1-3
  • 29.­5-10
  • 29.­15
  • 29.­19-20
  • 30.­1-2
  • 30.­15
  • 30.­52
  • 31.­1-3
  • 31.­62
  • 32.­1-2
  • 32.­36
  • 32.­45
  • 33.­1-2
  • 33.­87
  • 33.­126
  • 34.­1-2
  • 34.­13
  • 34.­31
  • 34.­36
  • 34.­52
  • 35.­2-3
  • 35.­5-6
  • 35.­49
  • 35.­54
  • 35.­56
  • 35.­60
  • 35.­294
  • 35.­299
  • 35.­302
  • 35.­306
  • 35.­308
  • 36.­1-10
  • 36.­14
  • 36.­18
  • 37.­1-2
  • 37.­30
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­75-76
  • 37.­107-109
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­115
  • 37.­124
  • 37.­126
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­4
  • 38.­7
  • 38.­10
  • 38.­51
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­50
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­32
  • 52.­149
  • 53.­56
  • 53.­141
  • 53.­145
  • 53.­149
  • 53.­574
  • 53.­920-921
  • 53.­924
  • 54.­1-3
  • 54.­7-8
  • 54.­60
  • 54.­63
  • 54.­65-66
  • 54.­82
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­99-105
  • n.­5
  • n.­99
  • n.­287
  • n.­305
  • n.­337
  • n.­339
  • n.­357
  • n.­383
  • n.­425-426
  • n.­440
  • n.­478
  • n.­568
  • n.­597
  • n.­612
  • n.­656
  • n.­658
  • n.­664
  • n.­781
  • n.­898
  • n.­907
  • n.­935
  • n.­1046
  • n.­1296
  • n.­1312
  • n.­1314
  • n.­1317
  • n.­1320
  • n.­1616
  • n.­1702
  • n.­1707
  • n.­1736-1737
  • n.­1747
  • n.­1757
  • n.­1804
  • n.­1900
  • n.­1980
  • n.­1983
  • n.­2023
  • n.­2062
  • n.­2245
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2457
  • n.­2459-2460
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2541
  • n.­2820
  • n.­2823-2825
  • n.­2828
  • n.­3014-3015
  • n.­3276
  • n.­3305
  • n.­3307-3309
  • n.­3311
  • n.­3332
  • n.­3334
  • n.­3346
  • n.­3381
  • n.­3383
  • g.­53
  • g.­55
  • g.­328
  • g.­412
  • g.­512
  • g.­595
  • g.­659
  • g.­688
  • g.­726
  • g.­791
  • g.­816
  • g.­861
  • g.­864
  • g.­902
  • g.­905
  • g.­906
  • g.­913
  • g.­933
  • g.­938
  • g.­939
  • g.­997
  • g.­1000
  • g.­1082
  • g.­1136
  • g.­1176
  • g.­1314
  • g.­1316
  • g.­1413
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1572
  • g.­1595
  • g.­1680
  • g.­1717
  • g.­1756
  • g.­1760
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1765
  • g.­1857
  • g.­1876
  • g.­1898
  • g.­1899
  • g.­1974
  • g.­1996
  • g.­2136
g.­999

Mañjusvara

Wylie:
  • ’jam pa’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་པའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjughoṣa
  • mañjusvara

See “Mañjughoṣa.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 27.­31
  • n.­1640
  • g.­997
g.­1018

Mars

Wylie:
  • mig dmar
Tibetan:
  • མིག་དམར།
Sanskrit:
  • aṅgāraka

See “Aṅgāraka.”

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­75
  • 15.­73
  • 15.­157
  • 15.­165-166
  • 24.­4
  • 24.­59
  • 24.­89
  • 24.­91
  • n.­1362
  • n.­1407
  • n.­1409
  • n.­1419
  • g.­128
g.­1023

master

Wylie:
  • slob dpon
Tibetan:
  • སློབ་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • ācārya

Teacher or master, especially a spiritual master. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “ācārya.”

Located in 74 passages in the translation:

  • i.­15
  • 1.­118
  • 2.­121
  • 2.­126-127
  • 2.­129-130
  • 2.­134
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­178
  • 2.­181
  • 2.­184
  • 2.­188
  • 2.­191-194
  • 2.­196-198
  • 2.­200-204
  • 2.­206-210
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­7-8
  • 4.­10
  • 11.­4-8
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­12
  • 11.­22-23
  • 11.­25-27
  • 11.­31-34
  • 11.­42
  • 11.­90
  • 14.­38
  • 28.­45
  • 34.­2
  • 35.­125
  • 37.­59
  • 54.­5
  • n.­370
  • n.­401
  • n.­436
  • n.­482-483
  • n.­492
  • n.­531
  • n.­537
  • n.­540
  • n.­781
  • n.­1048
  • n.­3315
  • g.­20
  • g.­1146
  • g.­1418
g.­1028

mātṛ

Wylie:
  • ma mo
Tibetan:
  • མ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mātṛ

A class of female spirits, sometimes called mother goddesses.

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­103
  • 1.­105
  • 2.­83
  • 3.­6
  • 14.­76
  • 14.­166
  • 15.­186
  • 15.­188
  • 25.­7
  • 30.­18
  • 31.­43
  • 31.­55
  • 35.­84
  • 35.­102
  • 35.­134
  • 35.­143
  • 35.­171
  • 35.­201
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­83
  • 50.­5
  • 51.­52
  • 51.­71
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­910
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­47
  • n.­1079
  • n.­1259
  • n.­1865
  • n.­2474
  • g.­39
  • g.­44
  • g.­46
  • g.­300
  • g.­323
  • g.­611
  • g.­714
  • g.­716
  • g.­853
  • g.­923
  • g.­948
  • g.­1031
  • g.­1054
  • g.­1170
  • g.­1290
  • g.­1384
  • g.­1530
  • g.­1918
  • g.­1922
  • g.­1998
  • g.­2007
  • g.­2025
  • g.­2139
g.­1038

Mercury

Wylie:
  • gza’ lhag pa
Tibetan:
  • གཟའ་ལྷག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • budha

See “Budha.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­154
  • 15.­159
  • 15.­161
  • 15.­173
  • 24.­186
  • g.­315
g.­1042

Meṣa

Wylie:
  • lug
Tibetan:
  • ལུག
Sanskrit:
  • meṣa

Aries (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • g.­154
g.­1043

Mīna

Wylie:
  • nya
Tibetan:
  • ཉ།
Sanskrit:
  • mīna

Pisces (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • g.­1206
g.­1045

Mithuna

Wylie:
  • sbyor ba
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • mithuna

Gemini (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • g.­530
g.­1046

mleccha

Wylie:
  • kla klo
Tibetan:
  • ཀླ་ཀློ།
Sanskrit:
  • mleccha

This somewhat vague term is applied to people and societies outside the brahmanical fold, i.e., foreigners, indigenous tribal groups, etc. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “barbarian.”

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­506-508
  • 53.­511
  • 53.­578
  • 53.­580
  • 53.­661
  • 53.­751
  • 53.­824
  • 54.­91
  • n.­3005
  • n.­3011
  • n.­3073
  • n.­3127
  • g.­227
  • g.­602
  • g.­1583
g.­1052

mudrā

Wylie:
  • phyag rgya
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱག་རྒྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • mudrā

A particular position of hands of magical or esoteric significance; also an emblem or insignia.

Located in 631 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • i.­4
  • i.­8
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 1.­71
  • 2.­10
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­26
  • 2.­28
  • 2.­32
  • 2.­34
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­43-45
  • 2.­47
  • 2.­50-53
  • 2.­55-58
  • 2.­60
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­64
  • 2.­66
  • 2.­68
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­77
  • 2.­80
  • 2.­83-84
  • 2.­88
  • 2.­91
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­97
  • 2.­122
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­134-135
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­151-153
  • 2.­159
  • 2.­164
  • 2.­166-173
  • 2.­175-176
  • 2.­181
  • 2.­184
  • 2.­194
  • 2.­199
  • 2.­202-203
  • 3.­3
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­31
  • 9.­10
  • 11.­6
  • 13.­58
  • 13.­64
  • 14.­50
  • 15.­4
  • 26.­41
  • 27.­56
  • 28.­30
  • 31.­14
  • 31.­19
  • 31.­27-28
  • 31.­61
  • 33.­19
  • 34.­2-3
  • 34.­5-6
  • 34.­9-15
  • 34.­17-20
  • 34.­22
  • 34.­26-28
  • 34.­30-32
  • 34.­52
  • 35.­1-2
  • 35.­4-6
  • 35.­13
  • 35.­22
  • 35.­26
  • 35.­29
  • 35.­31-32
  • 35.­35-36
  • 35.­38-45
  • 35.­47-48
  • 35.­53
  • 35.­55-56
  • 35.­59-61
  • 35.­63-66
  • 35.­68
  • 35.­70-71
  • 35.­74
  • 35.­76
  • 35.­78
  • 35.­80
  • 35.­82-84
  • 35.­87-88
  • 35.­91-94
  • 35.­96-103
  • 35.­106-107
  • 35.­110
  • 35.­113
  • 35.­115
  • 35.­117-119
  • 35.­121
  • 35.­124-125
  • 35.­127-133
  • 35.­136
  • 35.­138-142
  • 35.­144-157
  • 35.­159-162
  • 35.­164
  • 35.­166
  • 35.­169-171
  • 35.­173-176
  • 35.­178-182
  • 35.­184-186
  • 35.­188-189
  • 35.­191-206
  • 35.­208-209
  • 35.­213-222
  • 35.­225-227
  • 35.­229-231
  • 35.­234-236
  • 35.­238-247
  • 35.­249
  • 35.­251-261
  • 35.­263
  • 35.­265-266
  • 35.­268
  • 35.­270-271
  • 35.­273-276
  • 35.­278
  • 35.­280
  • 35.­282-283
  • 35.­285-286
  • 35.­288-290
  • 35.­292
  • 35.­294-295
  • 35.­308
  • 36.­1-18
  • 37.­2-33
  • 37.­36-69
  • 37.­71-85
  • 37.­88-91
  • 37.­93
  • 37.­95
  • 37.­97-103
  • 37.­105-108
  • 37.­112-113
  • 37.­115-116
  • 37.­119
  • 37.­121-123
  • 37.­126
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­8
  • 38.­10
  • 38.­12
  • 38.­14
  • 38.­16-17
  • 38.­38
  • 38.­41
  • 38.­51
  • 51.­34
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­40
  • 52.­146
  • n.­284
  • n.­297
  • n.­305
  • n.­336
  • n.­350
  • n.­395
  • n.­429
  • n.­435
  • n.­443
  • n.­447
  • n.­480
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­506
  • n.­536
  • n.­784
  • n.­1667
  • n.­1743-1745
  • n.­1875
  • n.­1913
  • n.­2003
  • n.­2005-2007
  • n.­2010
  • n.­2012-2013
  • n.­2024
  • n.­2026-2027
  • n.­2029
  • n.­2034
  • n.­2036
  • n.­2038
  • n.­2040
  • n.­2043
  • n.­2045-2046
  • n.­2048
  • n.­2050
  • n.­2058-2059
  • n.­2063
  • n.­2068
  • n.­2082
  • n.­2084
  • n.­2090
  • n.­2094-2096
  • n.­2104-2105
  • n.­2107-2108
  • n.­2124
  • n.­2126
  • n.­2128
  • n.­2131-2132
  • n.­2134
  • n.­2147
  • n.­2151
  • n.­2154-2156
  • n.­2159
  • n.­2163-2165
  • n.­2168
  • n.­2175
  • n.­2182
  • n.­2185
  • n.­2187-2190
  • n.­2192
  • n.­2195
  • n.­2198-2199
  • n.­2201
  • n.­2205-2206
  • n.­2209
  • n.­2211
  • n.­2213
  • n.­2216
  • n.­2220
  • n.­2223
  • n.­2225-2228
  • n.­2230
  • n.­2236
  • n.­2240
  • n.­2242
  • n.­2245
  • n.­2250
  • n.­2252
  • n.­2261-2262
  • n.­2265
  • n.­2267-2268
  • n.­2270-2271
  • n.­2274-2275
  • n.­2277
  • n.­2279
  • n.­2283-2284
  • n.­2286-2287
  • n.­2292
  • n.­2294
  • n.­2299
  • n.­2310
  • n.­2313
  • n.­2323-2324
  • n.­2326-2329
  • n.­2331-2333
  • n.­2335-2348
  • n.­2351
  • n.­2353
  • n.­2358
  • n.­2368
  • n.­2370
  • n.­2372
  • n.­2375
  • n.­2377
  • n.­2385
  • n.­2398
  • n.­2401
  • n.­2413
  • n.­2416
  • n.­2419-2421
  • n.­2432-2433
  • n.­2436
  • n.­2439
  • n.­2441-2442
  • n.­2456-2457
  • n.­3950
  • n.­4002
  • n.­4187
  • n.­5535
  • n.­5551
  • n.­5553
  • n.­5570
  • n.­5649
  • g.­486
  • g.­2054
g.­1056

Muni

Wylie:
  • thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • muni

One of the sages (ṛṣi).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83
  • g.­1386
g.­1063

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 100 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­80
  • 1.­82
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­160
  • 2.­170
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­6
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­100
  • 4.­103
  • 7.­18-19
  • 8.­8
  • 10.­1-2
  • 10.­6-7
  • 11.­127
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­30-31
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­16
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­44
  • 26.­49
  • 28.­36
  • 37.­34
  • 50.­5
  • 52.­25
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­100
  • 53.­172
  • 53.­183
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­338
  • 53.­425
  • 53.­530
  • 53.­762-763
  • 53.­799
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­104
  • n.­717
  • n.­725
  • n.­1516
  • n.­1557
  • n.­1592
  • n.­1757
  • n.­1775
  • n.­2859
  • n.­2934
  • n.­3026
  • n.­3104
  • n.­3186
  • n.­3312
  • g.­68
  • g.­96
  • g.­140
  • g.­266
  • g.­322
  • g.­357
  • g.­457
  • g.­497
  • g.­661
  • g.­673
  • g.­694
  • g.­780
  • g.­788
  • g.­790
  • g.­823
  • g.­907
  • g.­915
  • g.­976
  • g.­977
  • g.­993
  • g.­1070
  • g.­1087
  • g.­1114
  • g.­1118
  • g.­1142
  • g.­1181
  • g.­1366
  • g.­1444
  • g.­1445
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1745
  • g.­1752
  • g.­1847
  • g.­1854
  • g.­1864
  • g.­1877
  • g.­2019
  • g.­2092
g.­1078

nakṣatra

Wylie:
  • rgyu skar
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུ་སྐར།
Sanskrit:
  • nakṣatra

An asterism or constellation; also a class of deities.

Located in 121 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­95
  • 1.­97
  • 14.­70
  • 24.­4
  • 24.­6
  • 24.­8
  • 24.­10
  • 24.­12
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­35
  • 24.­43-44
  • 24.­47-48
  • 24.­52
  • 24.­54
  • 24.­64-65
  • 24.­69
  • 24.­74
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­81
  • 24.­86
  • 24.­91
  • 24.­97-98
  • 24.­103
  • 24.­105
  • 24.­107-108
  • 24.­112
  • 24.­115
  • 24.­117
  • 24.­129
  • 24.­131
  • 24.­134
  • 24.­137
  • 24.­140
  • 24.­144
  • 24.­180-182
  • 24.­207
  • 24.­212
  • 24.­214-215
  • 24.­218
  • 24.­220
  • 24.­223
  • 24.­225
  • 24.­233
  • 25.­1-2
  • 25.­7
  • 27.­33
  • 28.­27
  • 31.­10
  • 51.­68
  • 52.­19
  • 53.­910
  • n.­1363-1364
  • n.­1386
  • n.­1388-1389
  • n.­1398
  • n.­1403
  • n.­1406-1408
  • n.­1412
  • n.­1416
  • n.­1421
  • n.­1430
  • n.­1487
  • n.­2624
  • n.­3542
  • g.­12
  • g.­130
  • g.­139
  • g.­151
  • g.­161
  • g.­166
  • g.­174
  • g.­186
  • g.­231
  • g.­249
  • g.­351
  • g.­387
  • g.­396
  • g.­591
  • g.­609
  • g.­647
  • g.­648
  • g.­770
  • g.­848
  • g.­856
  • g.­886
  • g.­1051
  • g.­1055
  • g.­1081
  • g.­1190
  • g.­1191
  • g.­1192
  • g.­1253
  • g.­1265
  • g.­1266
  • g.­1278
  • g.­1287
  • g.­1338
  • g.­1345
  • g.­1485
  • g.­1546
  • g.­1552
  • g.­1697
  • g.­1740
  • g.­1792
  • g.­1827
  • g.­1905
  • g.­1907
  • g.­2095
g.­1124

Nirmāṇarati

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇarati

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­1127

nirvāṇa

Wylie:
  • mya ngan las ’das pa
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirvāṇa

The state of “extinction,” said to be blissful and inviolable, where the afflictions are extinguished and one is not subject to ever be born again.

Located in 77 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­29
  • 1.­31
  • 1.­63-64
  • 1.­74
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­112
  • 2.­131
  • 7.­1-2
  • 9.­21
  • 11.­94
  • 11.­259
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­122
  • 15.­217
  • 17.­9
  • 24.­29
  • 24.­33
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­20
  • 32.­30
  • 33.­104
  • 34.­39-40
  • 34.­45
  • 34.­50-51
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­235
  • 35.­294
  • 35.­302
  • 37.­124
  • 38.­3
  • 38.­37
  • 50.­2
  • 51.­77
  • 53.­11
  • 53.­14-16
  • 53.­24
  • 53.­40
  • 53.­52
  • 53.­56-57
  • 53.­61
  • 53.­76
  • 53.­93
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­108-109
  • 53.­117
  • 53.­129
  • 53.­132
  • 53.­153
  • 53.­191
  • 53.­196
  • 53.­198
  • 53.­225
  • 53.­230
  • 53.­237
  • 53.­327
  • 53.­376
  • 53.­736
  • 54.­20
  • n.­623
  • n.­2794-2795
  • n.­2800
  • n.­2846
  • n.­2908
  • n.­2933
  • n.­6142
  • g.­153
  • g.­597
  • g.­1388
g.­1134

oblation

Wylie:
  • sbyin sreg
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱིན་སྲེག
Sanskrit:
  • homa

See “homa.”

Located in 89 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­135
  • 2.­137-138
  • 2.­182
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­5
  • 10.­5-6
  • 10.­8
  • 11.­156
  • 13.­3
  • 13.­30
  • 13.­34
  • 13.­36
  • 13.­61
  • 14.­67
  • 14.­69
  • 14.­88-89
  • 14.­102
  • 15.­4
  • 15.­6
  • 26.­24
  • 26.­27
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­38-39
  • 26.­42-46
  • 26.­53
  • 27.­48-53
  • 27.­56
  • 28.­11-14
  • 28.­18-27
  • 28.­32-34
  • 28.­44
  • 29.­9
  • 29.­11
  • 29.­16-17
  • 29.­19
  • 51.­35
  • 52.­18
  • 52.­21-22
  • 52.­38
  • 52.­62
  • 52.­87
  • n.­262
  • n.­401
  • n.­406-407
  • n.­1008
  • n.­1567
  • n.­1573
  • n.­1577
  • n.­1662
  • n.­1682
  • n.­1716
  • n.­1723-1724
  • n.­1748
  • n.­1799
  • n.­2628
  • n.­2766
  • g.­598
g.­1136

One Syllable

Wylie:
  • yig gcig pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡིག་གཅིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ekākṣara

An epithet of deities, such as Mañjuśrī or Yamāntaka, whose mantras consists of a single syllable (ekākṣara).

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8-9
  • 1.­16
  • 3.­2
  • 9.­4
  • 14.­2
  • 14.­4-6
  • 14.­71
  • 14.­77
  • 14.­79-80
  • 14.­92
  • 14.­123
  • 14.­138
  • 14.­140
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­3
  • 26.­5
  • 26.­10
  • 26.­56-57
  • 26.­61
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­43-45
  • 35.­87
  • 37.­68-69
  • 38.­39
  • 50.­16
  • 53.­174
  • 53.­360
  • n.­20
  • n.­685
  • n.­1028
  • n.­1099
  • n.­1261
  • n.­1501
  • n.­1518
  • n.­1580
  • n.­1596-1598
  • n.­2342
  • n.­2360
  • n.­2502
  • n.­2504
  • n.­2841
  • n.­2924
g.­1139

pāda

Wylie:
  • tshig rkang
Tibetan:
  • ཚིག་རྐང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pāda

The fourth part of a regular stanza.

Located in 155 passages in the translation:

  • 33.­12
  • 33.­26
  • n.­556
  • n.­610
  • n.­802
  • n.­822
  • n.­829
  • n.­844
  • n.­876
  • n.­918-919
  • n.­921
  • n.­963
  • n.­974
  • n.­1036
  • n.­1051
  • n.­1072
  • n.­1081
  • n.­1090
  • n.­1104
  • n.­1110
  • n.­1159
  • n.­1194
  • n.­1204
  • n.­1215
  • n.­1240
  • n.­1251-1252
  • n.­1266
  • n.­1273-1274
  • n.­1301
  • n.­1314
  • n.­1337
  • n.­1341-1343
  • n.­1348
  • n.­1351
  • n.­1358
  • n.­1366-1367
  • n.­1392
  • n.­1402
  • n.­1413
  • n.­1419
  • n.­1433
  • n.­1438
  • n.­1445
  • n.­1457
  • n.­1459
  • n.­1466-1467
  • n.­1485
  • n.­1496-1497
  • n.­1499
  • n.­1676
  • n.­1679
  • n.­1777
  • n.­1826
  • n.­1848
  • n.­1875
  • n.­1910
  • n.­1917
  • n.­1920-1921
  • n.­1928-1929
  • n.­1955
  • n.­1962
  • n.­1969
  • n.­1972
  • n.­1976
  • n.­1985
  • n.­1992
  • n.­1998
  • n.­2008-2009
  • n.­2011-2012
  • n.­2048-2049
  • n.­2065
  • n.­2067
  • n.­2085
  • n.­2102-2103
  • n.­2111
  • n.­2120
  • n.­2161
  • n.­2168-2169
  • n.­2193
  • n.­2197
  • n.­2209
  • n.­2226
  • n.­2324
  • n.­2446
  • n.­2459
  • n.­2496
  • n.­2520
  • n.­2535
  • n.­2567
  • n.­2569
  • n.­2586
  • n.­2603
  • n.­2712
  • n.­2740
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2832
  • n.­2838
  • n.­2882
  • n.­2895
  • n.­2902-2903
  • n.­2939
  • n.­2955
  • n.­2969
  • n.­3039
  • n.­3069
  • n.­3071
  • n.­3083
  • n.­3090
  • n.­3126
  • n.­3128
  • n.­3132
  • n.­3134
  • n.­3140-3142
  • n.­3167
  • n.­3171
  • n.­3174
  • n.­3179-3180
  • n.­3193
  • n.­3216
  • n.­3221
  • n.­3230
  • n.­3275
  • n.­3287-3288
  • n.­3304
  • n.­3323
  • n.­3325
  • n.­3334
  • n.­3356
  • n.­3359-3360
  • n.­3362
  • n.­3371
  • n.­4493
  • n.­5573
  • n.­5670
g.­1164

panic grass

Wylie:
  • dUr ba
Tibetan:
  • དཱུར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dūrvā

Panicum dactylon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­116
  • 26.­39
g.­1169

Paranirmita

Wylie:
  • yongs su sprul pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་སུ་སྤྲུལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • paranirmita

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 53.­1
g.­1173

Parīttābha

Wylie:
  • ’od chung
  • dge chung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཆུང་།
  • དགེ་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttābha

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­157
  • 2.­167
  • 53.­1
g.­1191

Phalgunī

Wylie:
  • gre dang dbo
Tibetan:
  • གྲེ་དང་དབོ།
Sanskrit:
  • phalgunī

The name of a nakṣatra. There are two Phalgunī, the “former” (Skt. pūrvā; Tib. gre) and the “latter” (Skt. uttarā; Tib. dbo).

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­152
  • 24.­7
  • 24.­74
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­135
  • 24.­214
  • n.­1403
  • n.­1406
  • n.­3778
g.­1203

piśāca

Wylie:
  • sha za
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • piśāca

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that, like several other classes of nonhuman beings, take spontaneous birth. Ranking below rākṣasas, they are less powerful and more akin to pretas. They are said to dwell in impure and perilous places, where they feed on impure things, including flesh. This could account for the name piśāca, which possibly derives from √piś, to carve or chop meat, as reflected also in the Tibetan sha za, “meat eater.” They are often described as having an unpleasant appearance, and at times they appear with animal bodies. Some possess the ability to enter the dead bodies of humans, thereby becoming so-called vetāla, to touch whom is fatal.

Located in 44 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­33
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­75
  • 1.­78
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­6
  • 11.­128
  • 24.­23
  • 26.­16
  • 28.­40
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­38
  • 32.­38
  • 35.­84
  • 37.­34
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 51.­71
  • 52.­123
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­380
  • 53.­392
  • 54.­16
  • n.­1259
  • n.­2314
  • n.­2934
  • n.­3290
  • g.­78
  • g.­111
  • g.­534
  • g.­535
  • g.­551
  • g.­1006
  • g.­1194
  • g.­1205
  • g.­1684
  • g.­1688
  • g.­1721
  • g.­1871
  • g.­2052
g.­1206

Pisces

Wylie:
  • nya
Tibetan:
  • ཉ།
Sanskrit:
  • mīna

See “Mīna.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­85
  • 24.­108
  • n.­1425
  • n.­1427
  • n.­1430
  • g.­1043
g.­1214

planet

Wylie:
  • gdon
  • gza’
Tibetan:
  • གདོན།
  • གཟའ།
Sanskrit:
  • graha

See “graha.”

Located in 86 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­75
  • 2.­120
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­30
  • 15.­73
  • 15.­153-154
  • 15.­156-157
  • 15.­164-165
  • 15.­168
  • 15.­171-173
  • 15.­176-177
  • 15.­180
  • 17.­1-2
  • 17.­27-28
  • 17.­35
  • 24.­1-2
  • 24.­4-5
  • 24.­20
  • 24.­36
  • 24.­44
  • 24.­50
  • 24.­59
  • 24.­64
  • 24.­76
  • 24.­79-80
  • 24.­89
  • 24.­98
  • 24.­104
  • 24.­111
  • 24.­116
  • 24.­118
  • 24.­182
  • 24.­186-187
  • 24.­218
  • 25.­1-2
  • 31.­11
  • 52.­122
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­702
  • 53.­710
  • 53.­910
  • n.­1172
  • n.­1229
  • n.­1231-1232
  • n.­1234
  • n.­1238
  • n.­1243
  • n.­1253
  • n.­1361-1362
  • n.­1391
  • n.­1396
  • n.­1399
  • n.­1407
  • n.­1409-1410
  • n.­1419
  • n.­1426
  • n.­1431
  • n.­1487
  • n.­1664
  • n.­2860
  • n.­3152
  • n.­3156
  • g.­128
  • g.­177
  • g.­308
  • g.­315
  • g.­548
  • g.­872
  • g.­1436
  • g.­1643
g.­1215

pledge

Wylie:
  • dam tshig
Tibetan:
  • དམ་ཚིག
Sanskrit:
  • samaya

See “samaya.”

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­71
  • 1.­73
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­46
  • 2.­59
  • 11.­4
  • 11.­149
  • 15.­104
  • 31.­6
  • 52.­146
  • n.­1872
  • g.­1418
g.­1240

Prakaṭāditya

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • prakaṭāditya

A king of Magadha who ruled in the sixth century.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • n.­3157
  • n.­3173
  • g.­1514
g.­1248

prātihāra

Wylie:
  • cho ’phrul gyi zla phyed
Tibetan:
  • ཆོ་འཕྲུལ་གྱི་ཟླ་ཕྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • prātihāra

A bright fortnight that is particularly auspicious; this term is used frequently, but the exact meaning is elusive.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­14
  • 8.­9
  • 14.­25
  • 15.­4
  • 26.­6-7
  • 26.­9
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­39
  • 26.­55
  • n.­1532
g.­1251

pratyeka­buddha

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyeka­buddha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 198 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­120
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­107-108
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­146
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­186-187
  • 2.­203
  • 2.­209
  • 4.­75
  • 4.­80-83
  • 4.­112-113
  • 4.­115
  • 5.­7
  • 7.­2
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­111
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­196-198
  • 11.­210
  • 11.­236
  • 12.­51
  • 14.­6
  • 15.­132
  • 15.­194
  • 17.­4
  • 25.­12-13
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­9
  • 30.­34
  • 34.­10
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­41
  • 37.­38
  • 37.­47
  • 37.­108
  • 38.­36
  • 38.­47
  • 38.­49
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­49
  • 51.­54
  • 52.­145
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­103
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­246
  • 53.­268-270
  • 53.­281
  • 53.­289
  • 53.­291-292
  • 53.­307
  • 53.­315
  • 53.­411
  • 53.­429
  • 53.­432-435
  • 53.­597
  • 53.­604-605
  • 53.­663
  • 53.­678
  • 53.­705-706
  • 53.­773
  • 54.­21
  • 54.­27
  • 54.­104
  • n.­122
  • n.­138
  • n.­584-585
  • n.­626
  • n.­725
  • n.­770
  • n.­1829
  • n.­2003
  • n.­2611
  • n.­2761
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2799
  • n.­2805
  • n.­2867
  • n.­2962
  • n.­2964
  • n.­3088
  • n.­3134
  • g.­28
  • g.­92
  • g.­107
  • g.­152
  • g.­258
  • g.­328
  • g.­347
  • g.­348
  • g.­402
  • g.­437
  • g.­456
  • g.­458
  • g.­512
  • g.­513
  • g.­613
  • g.­631
  • g.­657
  • g.­678
  • g.­728
  • g.­759
  • g.­797
  • g.­810
  • g.­818
  • g.­843
  • g.­844
  • g.­855
  • g.­944
  • g.­979
  • g.­1004
  • g.­1109
  • g.­1146
  • g.­1150
  • g.­1177
  • g.­1219
  • g.­1224
  • g.­1337
  • g.­1340
  • g.­1408
  • g.­1414
  • g.­1429
  • g.­1440
  • g.­1450
  • g.­1451
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1520
  • g.­1522
  • g.­1535
  • g.­1550
  • g.­1589
  • g.­1590
  • g.­1594
  • g.­1607
  • g.­1631
  • g.­1632
  • g.­1642
  • g.­1673
  • g.­1677
  • g.­1687
  • g.­1711
  • g.­1715
  • g.­1716
  • g.­1735
  • g.­1742
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1783
  • g.­1793
  • g.­1842
  • g.­1848
  • g.­1853
  • g.­1855
  • g.­1858
  • g.­1863
  • g.­1868
  • g.­1874
  • g.­1875
  • g.­1876
  • g.­1885
  • g.­1912
  • g.­2015
  • g.­2066
  • g.­2105
g.­1256

preta

Wylie:
  • yi dags
  • yi dwags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དགས།
  • ཡི་དྭགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance. Detailed descriptions of their realm and experience, including a list of the thirty-six classes of pretas, can be found in The Application of Mindfulness of the Sacred Dharma, Toh 287, 2.­1281– 2.1482.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 11.­128
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­19
  • 30.­22
  • 31.­40
  • 31.­55
  • 37.­62
  • 51.­41
  • 51.­71
  • 52.­21
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­410
  • 53.­427
  • 53.­474-475
  • 53.­477
  • 53.­481
  • 53.­634-636
  • 53.­672
  • 53.­907
  • 54.­71
  • 54.­92
  • 54.­101
  • n.­1817-1818
  • n.­2353
  • n.­2992
  • n.­6836
  • g.­2133
g.­1270

Puṇyaprasava

Wylie:
  • bsod nams skyes
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyaprasava

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­157
  • 53.­1
g.­1274

Pure Abode

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa

The generic name of the five pure realms inhabited by the higher orders of gods.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­20-21
  • 1.­38
  • 2.­49
  • 4.­83
  • 12.­1
  • 16.­35
  • 17.­34
  • 35.­2
  • 53.­594
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­104
  • n.­10
  • n.­1324
  • n.­2828
  • n.­3393
  • g.­816
g.­1287

Puṣya

Wylie:
  • rgyal
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣyā
  • puṣya

The name of a nakṣatra.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­152
  • 24.­6
  • 24.­69
  • 24.­135
  • 24.­181
  • 24.­218
  • 26.­15
  • n.­3679
g.­1293

Rāhu

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhu

One of the kings of asuras; the demon who is thought to cause an eclipse.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­92
  • 1.­94
  • 15.­157
  • 15.­163
  • 15.­169
  • 24.­203
  • 24.­205
  • 24.­216
  • 24.­218
  • 24.­222
  • 24.­224-226
  • n.­221
  • n.­1238
  • n.­1241
  • n.­1246
  • n.­1410
  • n.­1435
  • n.­1468
  • n.­3755
  • g.­548
g.­1299

rākṣasa

Wylie:
  • srin po
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasa
  • rakṣas

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that are often, but certainly not always, considered demonic in the Buddhist tradition. They are often depicted as flesh-eating monsters who haunt frightening places and are ugly and evil-natured with a yearning for human flesh, and who additionally have miraculous powers, such as being able to change their appearance.

Located in 75 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­42
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­75-76
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­6-7
  • 6.­11
  • 10.­6-7
  • 11.­128
  • 12.­15
  • 14.­75
  • 24.­22
  • 28.­40
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­42
  • 31.­55
  • 32.­38
  • 35.­81
  • 35.­102
  • 35.­202
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 38.­28
  • 50.­10
  • 51.­41
  • 51.­63
  • 51.­70
  • 52.­16
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­122
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­47
  • n.­441
  • n.­515
  • n.­521
  • n.­725
  • n.­1817-1818
  • n.­2086
  • g.­67
  • g.­112
  • g.­263
  • g.­446
  • g.­534
  • g.­603
  • g.­796
  • g.­798
  • g.­841
  • g.­1074
  • g.­1075
  • g.­1301
  • g.­1333
  • g.­1402
  • g.­1420
  • g.­1447
  • g.­1619
  • g.­1648
  • g.­1734
  • g.­1805
  • g.­1806
  • g.­2030
  • g.­2036
  • g.­2133
  • g.­2153
g.­1316

Ratnaketu

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i tog
  • rin chen tog
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་ཏོག
  • རིན་ཆེན་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaketu

One of the tathāgatas attending the delivery of the MMK; the tathāgata who seems to be an emanation of Mañjuśrī, identified with the mantra bhrūṁ.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­39
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­4
  • 14.­29
  • 14.­48
  • 14.­102
  • 14.­105
  • 14.­111
  • 26.­5
  • 27.­4
  • 27.­27
  • 35.­122
  • 37.­110
  • n.­1024
  • n.­1054
  • n.­1087
  • n.­1527
  • n.­1551
  • n.­1651
  • g.­1325
g.­1322

Ratnaśikhin

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśikhin

One of the eight tathāgatas.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­77
  • 5.­6
  • g.­1763
g.­1335

Realm of the Pure Abode

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa

The highest division of the realm of form, comprising its five highest heavens; also used as the name of the gods living there. The name is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “Śuddhāvāsa.”

Located in 181 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­40
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­44
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­76
  • 1.­95
  • 1.­97
  • 1.­99
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­106-107
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­149
  • 3.­1
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­80
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­8
  • 6.­5
  • 11.­1
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­3
  • 14.­6
  • 15.­106
  • 16.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­36
  • 26.­1
  • 27.­1
  • 28.­1
  • 28.­54
  • 29.­1
  • 30.­1
  • 31.­1
  • 32.­1
  • 33.­1
  • 34.­1
  • 35.­1
  • 35.­307
  • 36.­1
  • 37.­1
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­9
  • 51.­1
  • 53.­54
  • 53.­151
  • 53.­919
  • 54.­1
  • n.­2236
  • n.­2768
  • n.­2785
  • g.­18
  • g.­29
  • g.­60
  • g.­74
  • g.­77
  • g.­82
  • g.­89
  • g.­102
  • g.­114
  • g.­116
  • g.­150
  • g.­167
  • g.­184
  • g.­199
  • g.­200
  • g.­237
  • g.­239
  • g.­264
  • g.­265
  • g.­272
  • g.­277
  • g.­282
  • g.­285
  • g.­306
  • g.­307
  • g.­313
  • g.­330
  • g.­335
  • g.­340
  • g.­366
  • g.­367
  • g.­375
  • g.­388
  • g.­392
  • g.­394
  • g.­454
  • g.­474
  • g.­481
  • g.­574
  • g.­614
  • g.­624
  • g.­655
  • g.­667
  • g.­668
  • g.­720
  • g.­740
  • g.­777
  • g.­779
  • g.­821
  • g.­822
  • g.­842
  • g.­847
  • g.­859
  • g.­860
  • g.­863
  • g.­864
  • g.­892
  • g.­911
  • g.­927
  • g.­933
  • g.­978
  • g.­980
  • g.­981
  • g.­988
  • g.­989
  • g.­1007
  • g.­1034
  • g.­1066
  • g.­1079
  • g.­1080
  • g.­1105
  • g.­1116
  • g.­1117
  • g.­1162
  • g.­1176
  • g.­1233
  • g.­1243
  • g.­1307
  • g.­1309
  • g.­1344
  • g.­1362
  • g.­1372
  • g.­1404
  • g.­1407
  • g.­1409
  • g.­1482
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1519
  • g.­1536
  • g.­1537
  • g.­1560
  • g.­1571
  • g.­1585
  • g.­1598
  • g.­1602
  • g.­1617
  • g.­1621
  • g.­1622
  • g.­1633
  • g.­1634
  • g.­1669
  • g.­1698
  • g.­1704
  • g.­1706
  • g.­1722
  • g.­1744
  • g.­1747
  • g.­1758
  • g.­1777
  • g.­1831
  • g.­2009
  • g.­2016
  • g.­2057
  • g.­2059
  • g.­2061
  • g.­2070
  • g.­2071
  • g.­2072
  • g.­2106
  • g.­2126
  • g.­2148
g.­1336

realm of the Thirty-Three

Wylie:
  • sum cu rtsa gsum
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • tṛdaśa

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 11.­159
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­49
  • 54.­67
  • g.­1443
g.­1338

Revatī

Wylie:
  • nam gru
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་གྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • revatī

The name of a nakṣatra; also a yakṣiṇī invoked in magical rites.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­152
  • 24.­9
  • 24.­107
  • 24.­144
  • 24.­181
  • 24.­225
  • 52.­39
  • 52.­46
  • 52.­48
g.­1341

rite

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karman

A rite that is meant to accomplish an activity (such as pacifying, nourishing, etc.). This term is also translated in other instances as “activity,” “karma,” “karman,” or “karmic accumulation.” In the latter three cases the term refers to karmic accumulation, positive or negative, that will produce results in the future, unless it is purified.

Located in 398 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­6
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 2.­50-51
  • 2.­57
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­80
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­88
  • 2.­91
  • 2.­94
  • 2.­99
  • 2.­101
  • 2.­113
  • 2.­127
  • 2.­131
  • 2.­137
  • 2.­192
  • 3.­1
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­20
  • 4.­26
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­53-54
  • 4.­114
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­12
  • 7.­9
  • 7.­11
  • 7.­13
  • 7.­23
  • 8.­7
  • 9.­4
  • 9.­20-21
  • 10.­8
  • 10.­30
  • 10.­35
  • 10.­40
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­57
  • 10.­59
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­3-4
  • 11.­6
  • 11.­14
  • 11.­60-61
  • 11.­155
  • 11.­158
  • 11.­180
  • 11.­185
  • 11.­193
  • 11.­208-209
  • 11.­228
  • 11.­264
  • 11.­266-267
  • 11.­269
  • 11.­273
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­4-5
  • 12.­11-12
  • 12.­15-16
  • 12.­24
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­15-16
  • 13.­19-21
  • 13.­23-24
  • 13.­34
  • 13.­37-38
  • 13.­40
  • 13.­43-46
  • 13.­50
  • 13.­53
  • 13.­55
  • 13.­58-59
  • 13.­64
  • 13.­68
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­37
  • 14.­41
  • 14.­66
  • 14.­71-73
  • 14.­77-80
  • 14.­88
  • 14.­92-94
  • 14.­100-101
  • 14.­106
  • 14.­115
  • 14.­124
  • 14.­154
  • 14.­157
  • 14.­167
  • 14.­171
  • 14.­173-174
  • 14.­176
  • 14.­179-180
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­6
  • 15.­68
  • 15.­92
  • 15.­202
  • 17.­31-32
  • 24.­8
  • 24.­106
  • 24.­180
  • 24.­186
  • 25.­27
  • 25.­35
  • 26.­5
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­23-24
  • 26.­26
  • 26.­32
  • 26.­38-40
  • 26.­43
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­58
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­16-17
  • 27.­20
  • 27.­32
  • 27.­43
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­49-50
  • 27.­52
  • 27.­54-55
  • 27.­57-59
  • 27.­61
  • 27.­63-64
  • 27.­66-75
  • 27.­77-84
  • 27.­86-87
  • 28.­1
  • 28.­8-10
  • 28.­12
  • 28.­23
  • 28.­28
  • 28.­30-32
  • 28.­34-35
  • 28.­42
  • 28.­45
  • 28.­52
  • 29.­2
  • 29.­8
  • 29.­19-20
  • 30.­23-24
  • 30.­45
  • 31.­26
  • 31.­28
  • 32.­13
  • 32.­22-23
  • 32.­41
  • 33.­23
  • 33.­40-42
  • 33.­46-47
  • 33.­49
  • 33.­81-82
  • 33.­87
  • 33.­105
  • 33.­116
  • 34.­18
  • 34.­25
  • 34.­28
  • 35.­38
  • 35.­48
  • 35.­50
  • 35.­54
  • 35.­57
  • 35.­60-61
  • 35.­64
  • 35.­70
  • 35.­77
  • 35.­135
  • 35.­137
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­144
  • 35.­173
  • 35.­175
  • 35.­179
  • 35.­206
  • 35.­208
  • 35.­218-219
  • 35.­253
  • 35.­258
  • 35.­260-261
  • 35.­268
  • 35.­270
  • 35.­289
  • 35.­291
  • 36.­1-2
  • 36.­15-16
  • 37.­2
  • 37.­6
  • 37.­20-22
  • 37.­25-26
  • 37.­42
  • 37.­97
  • 37.­106
  • 37.­111
  • 38.­49
  • 50.­3
  • 51.­25
  • 51.­29
  • 51.­34
  • 51.­36
  • 51.­46
  • 51.­49
  • 51.­74
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­10
  • 52.­17-19
  • 52.­21-22
  • 52.­24
  • 52.­33
  • 52.­38
  • 52.­44
  • 52.­53
  • 52.­61
  • 52.­67
  • 52.­69
  • 52.­75
  • 52.­85-86
  • 52.­116
  • 52.­124
  • 52.­136-137
  • 52.­140
  • 53.­436-438
  • 53.­922
  • 54.­12
  • 54.­34
  • 54.­38
  • 54.­52
  • 54.­80-82
  • n.­5
  • n.­320
  • n.­437
  • n.­457
  • n.­468
  • n.­512
  • n.­545
  • n.­549
  • n.­664
  • n.­685
  • n.­758
  • n.­767
  • n.­769
  • n.­774
  • n.­915
  • n.­928
  • n.­951-952
  • n.­974
  • n.­1014
  • n.­1030
  • n.­1034
  • n.­1053
  • n.­1078
  • n.­1174
  • n.­1301
  • n.­1424
  • n.­1519
  • n.­1591
  • n.­1607
  • n.­1654
  • n.­1660
  • n.­1663
  • n.­1668
  • n.­1675-1676
  • n.­1679-1680
  • n.­1729
  • n.­1776
  • n.­1821
  • n.­1887-1888
  • n.­1893
  • n.­1979
  • n.­1990
  • n.­2156
  • n.­2228
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2420
  • n.­2433
  • n.­2445
  • n.­2483
  • n.­2596-2597
  • n.­2602
  • n.­2631
  • n.­2643
  • n.­2694
  • n.­2709
  • n.­2739
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2985
  • n.­2991
  • n.­3254
  • n.­4689
  • g.­25
  • g.­71
  • g.­256
  • g.­695
  • g.­984
  • g.­1036
  • g.­1106
  • g.­1107
  • g.­1338
  • g.­1755
g.­1345

Rohiṇī

Wylie:
  • snar ma
Tibetan:
  • སྣར་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • rohiṇī

The name of a nakṣatra.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­96
  • 15.­153
  • 24.­6
  • 24.­47
  • 24.­131
  • 24.­212
  • n.­1389
  • n.­1451
  • n.­3696
  • n.­3775
g.­1349

ṛṣi

Wylie:
  • drang srong
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣi

Sage; also a class of semidivine beings.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­164
  • 2.­170
  • 2.­209
  • 31.­53
  • 32.­38
  • 37.­39
  • 37.­73
  • 37.­120
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­122
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­124
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­184
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­311
  • 53.­554
  • 53.­909
  • 54.­104
  • n.­222
  • n.­1429
  • n.­1873
  • n.­2801
  • n.­3045
  • g.­38
  • g.­40
  • g.­42
  • g.­80
  • g.­129
  • g.­179
  • g.­193
  • g.­238
  • g.­527
  • g.­615
  • g.­619
  • g.­767
  • g.­768
  • g.­1017
  • g.­1056
  • g.­1057
  • g.­1171
  • g.­1172
  • g.­1201
  • g.­1202
  • g.­1263
  • g.­1367
  • g.­1916
  • g.­1990
  • g.­2014
  • g.­2122
  • g.­2155
g.­1363

sādhana

Wylie:
  • sgrub thabs
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲུབ་ཐབས།
Sanskrit:
  • sādhana

A formal practice usually organized into sessions, which involves mantra and visualization.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 1.­33
  • 2.­201
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­63
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­13
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­20
  • 9.­22
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­155
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­6-10
  • 26.­12
  • 26.­14-15
  • 26.­19-22
  • 26.­24-25
  • 26.­27-28
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­32-36
  • 26.­48-49
  • 26.­51
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­58
  • 28.­1
  • 33.­19
  • 33.­32
  • 53.­358
  • 53.­382
  • 53.­435
  • n.­758
  • n.­1462
  • n.­1541
  • n.­1557
  • n.­1680
  • n.­2679
g.­1367

sage

Wylie:
  • drang srong
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣi

See “ṛṣi.”

Located in 143 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­82
  • 1.­84
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­168
  • 2.­170
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­109
  • 6.­10
  • 10.­23
  • 11.­23
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­94
  • 11.­108
  • 11.­138
  • 11.­143-145
  • 11.­166
  • 11.­172
  • 11.­184
  • 11.­187
  • 11.­201
  • 11.­227
  • 11.­256
  • 12.­45
  • 12.­48
  • 13.­20-21
  • 14.­4
  • 14.­9
  • 14.­17
  • 14.­28-29
  • 14.­69
  • 14.­74
  • 14.­76
  • 14.­105
  • 15.­84
  • 15.­107
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­221-222
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­12-14
  • 16.­18-19
  • 16.­31
  • 17.­33
  • 24.­21
  • 24.­28
  • 25.­19
  • 25.­23
  • 25.­32-33
  • 30.­47
  • 31.­36
  • 32.­28
  • 33.­39
  • 33.­118
  • 34.­13
  • 34.­29
  • 34.­34-35
  • 34.­37
  • 35.­113
  • 35.­116
  • 35.­167
  • 35.­171
  • 35.­195
  • 35.­214
  • 35.­290
  • 35.­293
  • 53.­37
  • 53.­71
  • 53.­75
  • 53.­84
  • 53.­113-115
  • 53.­120
  • 53.­127
  • 53.­164
  • 53.­180
  • 53.­187
  • 53.­190
  • 53.­197
  • 53.­251
  • 53.­294
  • 53.­599
  • 53.­606
  • 53.­848
  • 53.­856
  • 53.­919
  • 53.­921
  • 54.­55
  • 54.­57-58
  • 54.­63
  • 54.­72
  • 54.­88
  • n.­848
  • n.­1038
  • n.­1429
  • n.­1517
  • n.­1891
  • n.­1995
  • n.­2131
  • n.­2160
  • n.­2181
  • n.­3368
  • g.­38
  • g.­40
  • g.­42
  • g.­80
  • g.­129
  • g.­179
  • g.­193
  • g.­238
  • g.­527
  • g.­615
  • g.­619
  • g.­767
  • g.­768
  • g.­1017
  • g.­1056
  • g.­1057
  • g.­1171
  • g.­1172
  • g.­1201
  • g.­1202
  • g.­1263
  • g.­1349
  • g.­1386
  • g.­1501
  • g.­1689
  • g.­1916
  • g.­1990
  • g.­2014
  • g.­2122
  • g.­2155
g.­1368

Sagittarius

Wylie:
  • gzhu
Tibetan:
  • གཞུ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhanus

See “Dhanus.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­85
  • 24.­92
  • 24.­94
  • g.­397
g.­1380

Śakra

Wylie:
  • brgya byin
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱ་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakra

See “Indra.”

Located in 47 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 2.­115
  • 2.­138
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 4.­11
  • 4.­36
  • 5.­8
  • 9.­19
  • 11.­159
  • 14.­75
  • 14.­135
  • 24.­39
  • 32.­10
  • 32.­40
  • 33.­99
  • 35.­103
  • 35.­107
  • 38.­21
  • 51.­43
  • 52.­139
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­18
  • 53.­49
  • 53.­210
  • 53.­373
  • 53.­462
  • 53.­466
  • 53.­678
  • 53.­901
  • 53.­903
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­66-68
  • n.­2066
  • n.­2069
  • n.­2088
  • n.­2114
  • n.­2786
  • n.­2984
  • n.­3337
  • n.­3349
  • n.­3643
  • n.­6103
  • g.­602
  • g.­1357
g.­1385

Śākya Lodrö

Wylie:
  • shAkya blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • (not in the skt. source of the mmk)

The name of an important translator who was active during the early Sarma (gsar ma) period (c. 11th century).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­1386

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An epithet for the historical Buddha, Siddhārtha Gautama: he was a muni (“sage”) from the Śākya clan. He is counted as the fourth of the first four buddhas of the present Good Eon, the other three being Krakucchanda, Kanakamuni, and Kāśyapa. He will be followed by Maitreya, the next buddha in this eon.

Located in 275 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­8-10
  • 1.­12
  • 1.­19-22
  • 1.­30-32
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­39
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­44
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­51-52
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­67
  • 1.­84
  • 1.­101
  • 1.­107-108
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­139-140
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­150
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­183
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­76
  • 4.­82
  • 4.­84-85
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­102
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­3-5
  • 5.­7
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­6
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­3
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­1
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­151
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­170
  • 11.­199
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­47
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1-4
  • 14.­6-7
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­105-106
  • 16.­1
  • 17.­1-2
  • 24.­1
  • 24.­3
  • 25.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­12
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­62
  • 27.­1
  • 28.­1-2
  • 29.­1
  • 29.­3
  • 30.­1
  • 31.­1
  • 31.­3
  • 32.­1
  • 33.­1
  • 34.­1
  • 35.­1-3
  • 35.­5
  • 36.­1
  • 37.­1
  • 37.­110
  • 37.­123
  • 38.­1
  • 52.­1
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­190
  • 53.­855
  • 54.­1
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­99
  • 54.­101
  • n.­99
  • n.­418
  • n.­583
  • n.­597
  • n.­838
  • n.­861
  • n.­911
  • n.­986
  • n.­1308
  • n.­1310
  • n.­1635
  • n.­1834
  • n.­1836
  • n.­2014
  • n.­2160
  • n.­2460
  • n.­2492
  • n.­2768
  • n.­2788
  • n.­2894
  • n.­2905
  • n.­2910
  • n.­2914
  • n.­2929
  • n.­3060
  • n.­3248
  • n.­3294
  • n.­3305
  • n.­3368
  • n.­3390
  • g.­18
  • g.­29
  • g.­60
  • g.­74
  • g.­77
  • g.­82
  • g.­89
  • g.­102
  • g.­114
  • g.­116
  • g.­150
  • g.­167
  • g.­184
  • g.­199
  • g.­200
  • g.­232
  • g.­237
  • g.­239
  • g.­264
  • g.­265
  • g.­272
  • g.­277
  • g.­282
  • g.­285
  • g.­306
  • g.­307
  • g.­313
  • g.­330
  • g.­335
  • g.­340
  • g.­366
  • g.­367
  • g.­375
  • g.­388
  • g.­392
  • g.­394
  • g.­454
  • g.­474
  • g.­481
  • g.­574
  • g.­614
  • g.­624
  • g.­655
  • g.­667
  • g.­668
  • g.­691
  • g.­720
  • g.­740
  • g.­777
  • g.­779
  • g.­821
  • g.­822
  • g.­830
  • g.­842
  • g.­847
  • g.­859
  • g.­860
  • g.­863
  • g.­864
  • g.­879
  • g.­892
  • g.­911
  • g.­927
  • g.­933
  • g.­978
  • g.­980
  • g.­981
  • g.­988
  • g.­989
  • g.­1007
  • g.­1034
  • g.­1066
  • g.­1079
  • g.­1080
  • g.­1105
  • g.­1116
  • g.­1117
  • g.­1162
  • g.­1176
  • g.­1233
  • g.­1243
  • g.­1307
  • g.­1309
  • g.­1344
  • g.­1362
  • g.­1369
  • g.­1372
  • g.­1404
  • g.­1407
  • g.­1409
  • g.­1424
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1482
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1519
  • g.­1536
  • g.­1537
  • g.­1560
  • g.­1571
  • g.­1579
  • g.­1585
  • g.­1603
  • g.­1617
  • g.­1621
  • g.­1622
  • g.­1633
  • g.­1634
  • g.­1669
  • g.­1698
  • g.­1704
  • g.­1706
  • g.­1722
  • g.­1744
  • g.­1747
  • g.­1758
  • g.­1777
  • g.­1831
  • g.­2009
  • g.­2016
  • g.­2017
  • g.­2057
  • g.­2059
  • g.­2061
  • g.­2070
  • g.­2071
  • g.­2072
  • g.­2126
  • g.­2148
g.­1393

Samādhi

Wylie:
  • ting ’dzin
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་འཛིན།
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

Located in 42 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2-4
  • 1.­14-15
  • 1.­18-19
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­38
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­57
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­68-69
  • 1.­107-108
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­106-108
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­199
  • 15.­242
  • 17.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 35.­1-2
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­19
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­33
  • 53.­43
  • 53.­76
  • n.­12
  • n.­32
  • n.­1344
  • n.­2320
  • n.­2506
  • n.­2758
  • n.­3318
  • g.­829
g.­1418

samaya

Wylie:
  • dam tshig
Tibetan:
  • དམ་ཚིག
Sanskrit:
  • samaya

A commitment that binds a mantra practitioner with their deity and their master. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “pledge.”

Located in 106 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • i.­15
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­71
  • 1.­73
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­22
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­106
  • 2.­108-110
  • 2.­113-116
  • 2.­123
  • 2.­196
  • 2.­202
  • 2.­208
  • 4.­5-6
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­12
  • 8.­7
  • 10.­45
  • 11.­4-6
  • 11.­30
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­173
  • 11.­188
  • 11.­191
  • 11.­256
  • 12.­2
  • 15.­105
  • 17.­35
  • 24.­2
  • 34.­2
  • 34.­6
  • 34.­9
  • 36.­5
  • 37.­25
  • 37.­27-29
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­66
  • 37.­104
  • 37.­106
  • 37.­108
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­11
  • 50.­31-33
  • 50.­41
  • 50.­46
  • 50.­48
  • 51.­53-54
  • 52.­12
  • 52.­50
  • 52.­62
  • 52.­92
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­146
  • 54.­5-6
  • n.­319
  • n.­357
  • n.­367
  • n.­491
  • n.­636
  • n.­746
  • n.­781
  • n.­784
  • n.­879
  • n.­945
  • n.­2106
  • n.­2310
  • n.­2344-2346
  • n.­2433
  • n.­2457
  • n.­2493
  • n.­2519-2520
  • n.­2528
  • n.­2535
  • n.­2613
  • n.­2708
  • n.­2729
  • n.­3318
  • g.­1215
g.­1433

saṃsāra

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃsāra

The beginningless cycle of birth and death within the six realms of conditioned existence.

Located in 42 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­59
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­106
  • 4.­59
  • 4.­108
  • 5.­13
  • 11.­86
  • 11.­88
  • 11.­92
  • 11.­140
  • 11.­193
  • 14.­86
  • 14.­122
  • 15.­195
  • 16.­29
  • 17.­3
  • 24.­29
  • 24.­32
  • 32.­20
  • 33.­93-94
  • 33.­101
  • 34.­32
  • 34.­37
  • 35.­191
  • 35.­229
  • 51.­78
  • 53.­42
  • 53.­53
  • 53.­75
  • 53.­247
  • 53.­455
  • 53.­673
  • 54.­20
  • n.­821
  • n.­826
  • n.­1319
  • n.­1989
  • n.­2175
  • n.­3579
  • g.­37
  • g.­296
g.­1436

Śanaiścara

Wylie:
  • spen pa
Tibetan:
  • སྤེན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śanaiścara

The planet Saturn.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­94
  • n.­3758
  • g.­1492
g.­1438

saṅgha

Wylie:
  • dge ’dun
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅgha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Though often specifically reserved for the monastic community, this term can be applied to any of the four Buddhist communities‍—monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen‍—as well as to identify the different groups of practitioners, like the community of bodhisattvas or the community of śrāvakas. It is also the third of the Three Jewels (triratna) of Buddhism: the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Community.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • 2.­196
  • 26.­15
  • 26.­30
  • 35.­41
  • 35.­282-283
  • 50.­44
  • 53.­629
  • 53.­675
  • g.­490
  • g.­1782
g.­1440

Śaṅkara

Wylie:
  • bde byed
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • śaṅkara

One of the pratyeka­buddhas attending the delivery of the MMK; a south Indian king, contemporary of Mahendra.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­60
  • 53.­566
  • g.­315
g.­1452

Śāntamati

Wylie:
  • blo gros zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāntamati

One of the sixteen great bodhisattvas. The content of the list varies from text to text.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­74
  • 5.­5
  • 52.­1
  • 52.­4
  • 52.­9-10
  • 52.­13
g.­1459

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra

One of the śrāvakas attending the delivery of the MMK; one of the eight great śrāvakas.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­62
  • 4.­81
  • 5.­7
  • 11.­196
  • 53.­1
g.­1492

Saturn

Wylie:
  • spen pa
Tibetan:
  • སྤེན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śanaiścara

See “Śanaiścara.”

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­157
  • 15.­163
  • 15.­166
  • 24.­67
  • 24.­98
  • 24.­116
  • n.­1172
  • n.­1241
  • n.­1413
  • g.­1436
g.­1498

Scorpio

Wylie:
  • sdig pa
Tibetan:
  • སྡིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vṛścika

See “Vṛścika.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­73
  • 15.­85
  • 24.­87
  • n.­1416
  • g.­2115
g.­1502

siddha

Wylie:
  • grub pa
Tibetan:
  • གྲུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddha

Accomplished being; also a class of semidivine beings similar to vidyādharas.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­209
  • 4.­85
  • 9.­19
  • 10.­6
  • 14.­129
  • 14.­132
  • 15.­86
  • 26.­7
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­35
  • 37.­35
  • 53.­124
  • 53.­126
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­909
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­47
  • 54.­104
  • n.­764
  • n.­1103
  • n.­1530
  • g.­919
g.­1508

siddhi

Wylie:
  • dngos grub
Tibetan:
  • དངོས་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhi

See “accomplishment.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • n.­764
  • n.­3364
  • n.­4867
  • n.­4916
  • n.­5004
  • g.­22
g.­1514

Siṃha

Wylie:
  • seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha

A Licchavi king, contemporary of the Buddha; a dynasty in Orissa contemporary of Prakaṭāditya.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­324
  • 53.­755
  • 53.­757-758
  • n.­2906
  • n.­3179
  • g.­826
g.­1525

Sitātapatra

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor gdugs dkar po
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་གདུགས་དཀར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sitātapatra

One of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­43
  • 2.­145
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­56
  • 30.­50
  • 35.­39
  • 35.­275
  • 37.­11
  • 38.­17
  • 53.­360
  • n.­1538
  • n.­1548
  • n.­1618
  • n.­2464
  • n.­6284
g.­1540

sphere of phenomena

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbyings
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབྱིངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhātu

Things as they truly are, with nothing imputed to them through dualistic thinking. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “dharmadhātu.”

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­44
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­55
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­116-117
  • 25.­16
  • 25.­20
  • 33.­2
  • 35.­217
  • 37.­111
  • 52.­11
  • 54.­52-53
  • 54.­81
  • 54.­104
  • n.­1498
  • n.­1500
  • n.­1900
  • n.­3380
  • g.­404
g.­1543

śrāvaka

Wylie:
  • nyan thos
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvaka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit term śrāvaka, and the Tibetan nyan thos, both derived from the verb “to hear,” are usually defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard to others.” Primarily this refers to those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat seeking their own liberation and nirvāṇa. They are the practitioners of the first turning of the wheel of the Dharma on the four noble truths, who realize the suffering inherent in saṃsāra and focus on understanding that there is no independent self. By conquering afflicted mental states (kleśa), they liberate themselves, attaining first the stage of stream enterers at the path of seeing, followed by the stage of once-returners who will be reborn only one more time, and then the stage of non-returners who will no longer be reborn into the desire realm. The final goal is to become an arhat. These four stages are also known as the “four results of spiritual practice.”

Located in 338 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • i.­6
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­38
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­63-64
  • 1.­66
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­120
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­107-108
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­186-187
  • 2.­203-204
  • 2.­209
  • 4.­80-83
  • 4.­113
  • 4.­115
  • 5.­7
  • 7.­2
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­141
  • 11.­143
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­178
  • 11.­196-198
  • 11.­210
  • 11.­236
  • 12.­51
  • 14.­6
  • 15.­132
  • 15.­193
  • 17.­4
  • 25.­12-13
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­9
  • 30.­33
  • 34.­10
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­302
  • 37.­47
  • 37.­108
  • 38.­36-37
  • 38.­48-49
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­49
  • 52.­145
  • 53.­2
  • 53.­8
  • 53.­14
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­66
  • 53.­73
  • 53.­84
  • 53.­87
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­105
  • 53.­112
  • 53.­117
  • 53.­119
  • 53.­128
  • 53.­136-137
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­146
  • 53.­159
  • 53.­174
  • 53.­178
  • 53.­204
  • 53.­210
  • 53.­216
  • 53.­239
  • 53.­241
  • 53.­245-246
  • 53.­251
  • 53.­253
  • 53.­266
  • 53.­315
  • 53.­404-405
  • 53.­678
  • 53.­718-719
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­21
  • 54.­27
  • 54.­104
  • n.­26
  • n.­138
  • n.­626
  • n.­770
  • n.­1327
  • n.­2003
  • n.­2366
  • n.­2475
  • n.­2611
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2818
  • n.­2866-2867
  • n.­2885
  • n.­2901
  • n.­2948
  • n.­2964
  • g.­43
  • g.­95
  • g.­97
  • g.­99
  • g.­110
  • g.­121
  • g.­134
  • g.­138
  • g.­158
  • g.­165
  • g.­178
  • g.­213
  • g.­229
  • g.­230
  • g.­234
  • g.­248
  • g.­259
  • g.­260
  • g.­384
  • g.­386
  • g.­393
  • g.­395
  • g.­403
  • g.­413
  • g.­415
  • g.­430
  • g.­431
  • g.­432
  • g.­434
  • g.­447
  • g.­452
  • g.­453
  • g.­455
  • g.­478
  • g.­479
  • g.­519
  • g.­524
  • g.­528
  • g.­529
  • g.­537
  • g.­570
  • g.­571
  • g.­581
  • g.­625
  • g.­633
  • g.­635
  • g.­636
  • g.­638
  • g.­657
  • g.­689
  • g.­696
  • g.­697
  • g.­712
  • g.­715
  • g.­722
  • g.­737
  • g.­746
  • g.­751
  • g.­755
  • g.­792
  • g.­794
  • g.­803
  • g.­804
  • g.­835
  • g.­837
  • g.­840
  • g.­891
  • g.­901
  • g.­902
  • g.­910
  • g.­918
  • g.­925
  • g.­931
  • g.­934
  • g.­936
  • g.­949
  • g.­952
  • g.­954
  • g.­956
  • g.­974
  • g.­1003
  • g.­1008
  • g.­1009
  • g.­1032
  • g.­1062
  • g.­1085
  • g.­1087
  • g.­1088
  • g.­1090
  • g.­1091
  • g.­1097
  • g.­1128
  • g.­1132
  • g.­1145
  • g.­1147
  • g.­1148
  • g.­1151
  • g.­1152
  • g.­1157
  • g.­1161
  • g.­1193
  • g.­1196
  • g.­1197
  • g.­1200
  • g.­1212
  • g.­1234
  • g.­1237
  • g.­1244
  • g.­1252
  • g.­1254
  • g.­1258
  • g.­1266
  • g.­1275
  • g.­1282
  • g.­1283
  • g.­1285
  • g.­1291
  • g.­1294
  • g.­1305
  • g.­1328
  • g.­1331
  • g.­1346
  • g.­1394
  • g.­1397
  • g.­1401
  • g.­1410
  • g.­1416
  • g.­1430
  • g.­1432
  • g.­1455
  • g.­1457
  • g.­1459
  • g.­1533
  • g.­1542
  • g.­1545
  • g.­1551
  • g.­1552
  • g.­1555
  • g.­1561
  • g.­1565
  • g.­1566
  • g.­1569
  • g.­1580
  • g.­1582
  • g.­1604
  • g.­1625
  • g.­1628
  • g.­1629
  • g.­1652
  • g.­1657
  • g.­1667
  • g.­1668
  • g.­1670
  • g.­1671
  • g.­1672
  • g.­1690
  • g.­1713
  • g.­1714
  • g.­1723
  • g.­1738
  • g.­1739
  • g.­1783
  • g.­1793
  • g.­1798
  • g.­1799
  • g.­1801
  • g.­1807
  • g.­1820
  • g.­1837
  • g.­1841
  • g.­1843
  • g.­1845
  • g.­1849
  • g.­1851
  • g.­1852
  • g.­1856
  • g.­1861
  • g.­1862
  • g.­1864
  • g.­1865
  • g.­1866
  • g.­1869
  • g.­1870
  • g.­1872
  • g.­1879
  • g.­1880
  • g.­1881
  • g.­1883
  • g.­1886
  • g.­1887
  • g.­1893
  • g.­1901
  • g.­1994
  • g.­2004
  • g.­2005
  • g.­2012
  • g.­2016
  • g.­2024
  • g.­2050
  • g.­2073
  • g.­2085
  • g.­2096
  • g.­2100
  • g.­2101
  • g.­2143
  • g.­2144
  • g.­2145
  • g.­2146
g.­1602

Śuddhāvāsa

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa

See “Realm of the Pure Abode.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • g.­1335
g.­1616

Sugata

Wylie:
  • bde bar gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugata

“Bliss-gone one”; an epithet of the Buddha or a tathāgata.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­32
  • 27.­3
  • 31.­2
  • 37.­41
  • 50.­3
  • 51.­75
  • 53.­765
  • 54.­51
  • n.­562
  • n.­747
  • n.­2324
  • n.­2599
  • n.­3189
  • n.­3192
g.­1642

Śukra

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • śukra

One of the pratyeka­buddhas attending the delivery of the MMK. A legendary king before the time of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­60
  • 53.­310
  • n.­3643
  • g.­2028
g.­1733

Suyāma

Wylie:
  • rab ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • suyāma

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­167
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­18
  • 53.­902
g.­1763

tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

A buddha manifesting through the twelve great deeds; the principal deity of a buddha family; one of the group of eight buddhas, starting with Ratnaśikhin; the title used for some deities that emanate from the level of the supreme awakening, such as the eight uṣṇīṣa kings. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “thus-gone.”

Located in 380 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­9
  • i.­15
  • 1.­3-4
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10-12
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16-17
  • 1.­21
  • 1.­28
  • 1.­30-32
  • 1.­36-38
  • 1.­46-47
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­68
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­29
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­102
  • 2.­109-110
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­150-151
  • 2.­186
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­65-66
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­77-80
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­105
  • 5.­6
  • 6.­5
  • 7.­1-2
  • 7.­4
  • 8.­5
  • 8.­11
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­3
  • 9.­20
  • 10.­46
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­129
  • 11.­151
  • 11.­272
  • 13.­47
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­4-5
  • 14.­48
  • 14.­105
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­231
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­24
  • 17.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­9
  • 25.­13-14
  • 25.­23-24
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­61
  • 27.­2-6
  • 27.­23
  • 27.­25
  • 27.­27-28
  • 27.­30
  • 27.­35-36
  • 27.­38
  • 27.­40-44
  • 27.­80
  • 28.­1
  • 30.­2
  • 32.­17
  • 32.­32
  • 33.­2
  • 34.­2
  • 35.­1
  • 35.­3-4
  • 35.­123
  • 35.­159
  • 35.­179
  • 36.­14
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­12
  • 37.­14
  • 37.­44
  • 37.­75
  • 37.­77
  • 37.­80
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­90-91
  • 37.­93-94
  • 37.­97
  • 37.­108-109
  • 37.­115
  • 37.­118
  • 37.­123
  • 38.­4
  • 50.­2
  • 51.­76
  • 52.­3
  • 52.­12
  • 52.­19
  • 53.­185
  • 53.­262
  • 53.­314
  • 53.­437
  • 53.­490
  • 53.­500
  • 53.­674
  • 54.­2-6
  • 54.­99-100
  • n.­17
  • n.­122
  • n.­299
  • n.­362
  • n.­458
  • n.­581
  • n.­590
  • n.­861
  • n.­1024
  • n.­1054
  • n.­1287
  • n.­1527
  • n.­1616
  • n.­1618-1620
  • n.­1634
  • n.­1638-1639
  • n.­1651
  • n.­1653
  • n.­1680
  • n.­1804-1805
  • n.­1900
  • n.­2268
  • n.­2372
  • n.­2435
  • n.­2442
  • n.­2453
  • n.­2613
  • n.­2746
  • n.­2748
  • n.­2874
  • n.­3160
  • n.­3311
  • n.­3313
  • n.­4920
  • g.­1
  • g.­4
  • g.­6
  • g.­23
  • g.­24
  • g.­32
  • g.­35
  • g.­36
  • g.­56
  • g.­58
  • g.­65
  • g.­75
  • g.­83
  • g.­84
  • g.­85
  • g.­86
  • g.­88
  • g.­90
  • g.­94
  • g.­103
  • g.­115
  • g.­118
  • g.­119
  • g.­157
  • g.­171
  • g.­192
  • g.­197
  • g.­204
  • g.­214
  • g.­242
  • g.­251
  • g.­280
  • g.­281
  • g.­311
  • g.­319
  • g.­347
  • g.­361
  • g.­373
  • g.­405
  • g.­407
  • g.­408
  • g.­421
  • g.­427
  • g.­438
  • g.­440
  • g.­441
  • g.­444
  • g.­456
  • g.­458
  • g.­459
  • g.­461
  • g.­462
  • g.­463
  • g.­464
  • g.­467
  • g.­480
  • g.­490
  • g.­504
  • g.­520
  • g.­601
  • g.­639
  • g.­640
  • g.­644
  • g.­649
  • g.­650
  • g.­651
  • g.­652
  • g.­653
  • g.­678
  • g.­679
  • g.­683
  • g.­712
  • g.­728
  • g.­729
  • g.­735
  • g.­741
  • g.­743
  • g.­753
  • g.­756
  • g.­775
  • g.­816
  • g.­817
  • g.­834
  • g.­844
  • g.­849
  • g.­857
  • g.­866
  • g.­876
  • g.­897
  • g.­903
  • g.­970
  • g.­1027
  • g.­1039
  • g.­1041
  • g.­1060
  • g.­1109
  • g.­1112
  • g.­1119
  • g.­1121
  • g.­1129
  • g.­1143
  • g.­1162
  • g.­1183
  • g.­1211
  • g.­1212
  • g.­1220
  • g.­1221
  • g.­1222
  • g.­1251
  • g.­1268
  • g.­1286
  • g.­1297
  • g.­1308
  • g.­1311
  • g.­1314
  • g.­1316
  • g.­1322
  • g.­1323
  • g.­1325
  • g.­1326
  • g.­1342
  • g.­1348
  • g.­1356
  • g.­1358
  • g.­1370
  • g.­1391
  • g.­1395
  • g.­1399
  • g.­1412
  • g.­1422
  • g.­1425
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1428
  • g.­1434
  • g.­1466
  • g.­1472
  • g.­1474
  • g.­1475
  • g.­1476
  • g.­1477
  • g.­1481
  • g.­1484
  • g.­1503
  • g.­1507
  • g.­1511
  • g.­1520
  • g.­1541
  • g.­1549
  • g.­1574
  • g.­1587
  • g.­1608
  • g.­1616
  • g.­1624
  • g.­1637
  • g.­1638
  • g.­1658
  • g.­1659
  • g.­1674
  • g.­1675
  • g.­1678
  • g.­1689
  • g.­1693
  • g.­1703
  • g.­1705
  • g.­1708
  • g.­1718
  • g.­1730
  • g.­1736
  • g.­1737
  • g.­1746
  • g.­1748
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1779
  • g.­1784
  • g.­1815
  • g.­1816
  • g.­1833
  • g.­1895
  • g.­1912
  • g.­1913
  • g.­1928
  • g.­1936
  • g.­2010
  • g.­2018
  • g.­2031
  • g.­2066
  • g.­2083
  • g.­2107
  • g.­2108
g.­1778

Taurus

Wylie:
  • glang
Tibetan:
  • གླང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vṛṣabha

See “Vṛṣabha.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­84
  • 24.­48-49
  • n.­1388-1389
  • g.­2113
g.­1780

Tejorāśi

Wylie:
  • gzi brjid phung po’i gtsug tor
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་བརྗིད་ཕུང་པོའི་གཙུག་ཏོར།
Sanskrit:
  • tejorāśi

One of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­43
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­151-152
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­56
  • 30.­49
  • 37.­12
  • 37.­20
  • 50.­13
  • 53.­359
  • n.­1538
  • n.­1618
  • n.­2276-2277
  • n.­2499
  • n.­4191
g.­1781

ten powers

Wylie:
  • stobs bcu
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśabala

The ten powers of a buddha or bodhisattva; these concern mostly their clairvoyant knowledge.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­68
  • 2.­104-105
  • 4.­72
  • 4.­92
  • 10.­17-18
  • 10.­57-58
  • 11.­17
  • 11.­111
  • 11.­159
  • 11.­175
  • 14.­41
  • 14.­74
  • 15.­91
  • 25.­2
  • n.­355
  • n.­733
  • n.­766
  • n.­841
  • n.­880
  • n.­1051
g.­1782

Three Jewels

Wylie:
  • dkon mchog gsum
Tibetan:
  • དཀོན་མཆོག་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnatraya
  • triratna

The Buddha, the Dharma, and the Saṅgha.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­42
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­74
  • 1.­116
  • 1.­119
  • 2.­42
  • 2.­196
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­178
  • 15.­123
  • 15.­128
  • 27.­28
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­49
  • 27.­59
  • 28.­4-5
  • 30.­43
  • 32.­44
  • 33.­35
  • 33.­125
  • 34.­2
  • 34.­7
  • 37.­125
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­30
  • 51.­27
  • 53.­676
  • n.­2518
  • g.­1438
g.­1784

thus-gone

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

See “tathāgata.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6-7
  • 1.­9-10
  • 2.­152
  • n.­2608
  • g.­1763
g.­1785

Tibet

Wylie:
  • rgya yul
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་ཡུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • cīnadeśa
  • cīna

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • 10.­18
  • 30.­3
  • 53.­509
  • n.­3013
  • g.­623
  • g.­1146
g.­1810

tuft of hair

Wylie:
  • mdzod spu
Tibetan:
  • མཛོད་སྤུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ūrṇā

See “ūrṇā.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­199
  • 14.­2
  • 17.­1
  • 35.­1
  • n.­73
  • g.­1889
g.­1811

Tula

Wylie:
  • srang
Tibetan:
  • སྲང་།
Sanskrit:
  • tula

Libra (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • g.­827
g.­1814

Tuṣita

Wylie:
  • dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • tuṣita
  • san­tuṣita

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Tuṣita (or sometimes Saṃtuṣita), literally “Joyous” or “Contented,” is one of the six heavens of the desire realm (kāmadhātu). In standard classifications, such as the one in the Abhidharmakośa, it is ranked as the fourth of the six counting from below. This god realm is where all future buddhas are said to dwell before taking on their final rebirth prior to awakening. There, the Buddha Śākyamuni lived his preceding life as the bodhisattva Śvetaketu. When departing to take birth in this world, he appointed the bodhisattva Maitreya, who will be the next buddha of this eon, as his Dharma regent in Tuṣita. For an account of the Buddha’s previous life in Tuṣita, see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 2.12, and for an account of Maitreya’s birth in Tuṣita and a description of this realm, see The Sūtra on Maitreya’s Birth in the Heaven of Joy, (Toh 199).

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 5.­8
  • 26.­18
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­528
  • n.­3035
  • g.­1454
g.­1835

universal emperor

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’ rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

See “cakravartin.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­49
  • 14.­135
  • g.­319
g.­1895

uṣṇīṣa

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར།
Sanskrit:
  • uṣṇīṣa

A protuberance on the head of a buddha; this term may also refer to beings who have this protuberance, known as uṣṇīṣa kings or uṣṇīṣa-tathāgatas.

Located in 65 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­2
  • 17.­36
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­24
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­55
  • 26.­61
  • 27.­43
  • 27.­56
  • 30.­2
  • 30.­36
  • 30.­49
  • 31.­14
  • 31.­19
  • 31.­27
  • 35.­39
  • 35.­215
  • 35.­274
  • 36.­10
  • 37.­3
  • 37.­12
  • 37.­14
  • 37.­18-24
  • 37.­26-28
  • 37.­81
  • 37.­117-118
  • 38.­17
  • 50.­13
  • 52.­131
  • 53.­357
  • n.­71
  • n.­414
  • n.­1351
  • n.­1357
  • n.­1501
  • n.­1606
  • n.­1804
  • n.­2255
  • n.­2272
  • n.­2274-2275
  • n.­2279
  • n.­2288
  • n.­2299
  • n.­2385
  • n.­2445-2446
  • n.­2497
  • n.­2746
  • n.­2919
  • n.­2925
  • g.­319
  • g.­644
  • g.­831
  • g.­975
g.­1897

uṣṇīṣa king

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • uṣṇīṣarāja

A class of fully awakened nonhuman beings, especially the chief eight among them.

Located in 64 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­44
  • 2.­145-146
  • 2.­151-152
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­50
  • 26.­56
  • 27.­42
  • 27.­44
  • 30.­4
  • 30.­50
  • 37.­11
  • 37.­14
  • 37.­17
  • 37.­29
  • 37.­115
  • n.­67
  • n.­1357-1358
  • n.­1538
  • n.­1580
  • n.­1607
  • n.­1618
  • n.­1804
  • n.­1836
  • n.­2272
  • n.­2463
  • n.­2497
  • n.­2919
  • n.­2922
  • n.­2924
  • g.­5
  • g.­16
  • g.­109
  • g.­195
  • g.­196
  • g.­205
  • g.­284
  • g.­320
  • g.­539
  • g.­634
  • g.­669
  • g.­670
  • g.­680
  • g.­681
  • g.­870
  • g.­994
  • g.­1396
  • g.­1487
  • g.­1493
  • g.­1523
  • g.­1524
  • g.­1525
  • g.­1763
  • g.­1780
  • g.­1840
  • g.­1895
  • g.­1896
  • g.­2051
  • g.­2058
  • g.­2123
g.­1910

vaipulya

Wylie:
  • shin tu rgyas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་རྒྱས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaipulya

Literally “extensive”/“elaborate,” it is a denomination applied to a limited number of important sūtras, including the Lalitavistara, the Suvarṇaprabhāsa, and a few others.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­1
g.­1919

Vaiśravaṇa

Wylie:
  • rnam thos
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśravaṇa

Another name of Kubera.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 52.­72
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­50
g.­1921

Vaivasvata

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaivasvata

A vidyārāja from the personal retinue of Vajrapāṇi; also a patronymic of Yama.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 1.­71
  • 1.­75
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­44
  • 52.­139
  • 52.­146
  • n.­2540
g.­1961

Vajrapāṇi

Wylie:
  • phyag na rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱག་ན་རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrapāṇi
  • kuliśapāṇi

A Buddhist deity and a legendary bodhisattva; in the MMK he is regarded as the master of powerful nonhuman beings.

Located in 287 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • i.­9
  • 1.­41
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­54-55
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­110-111
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­144
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­187-188
  • 2.­190
  • 4.­73
  • 5.­5
  • 8.­4-5
  • 11.­195
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­3
  • 16.­12
  • 16.­14
  • 16.­18
  • 26.­5
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22-23
  • 26.­30-32
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­23
  • 30.­28
  • 31.­49
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­101-102
  • 50.­1
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­23
  • 50.­38
  • 51.­1
  • 52.­1-2
  • 52.­4
  • 52.­13-14
  • 52.­88
  • 52.­141
  • 53.­1
  • 54.­104
  • n.­99
  • n.­467
  • n.­576
  • n.­935
  • n.­1304
  • n.­1308
  • n.­1550
  • n.­1559
  • n.­1561
  • n.­1821
  • n.­1871
  • n.­1895
  • n.­1947
  • n.­2322
  • n.­2425
  • n.­2494
  • n.­2511
  • n.­2523
  • n.­2525
  • n.­2537-2538
  • n.­2594
  • n.­2749
  • n.­2988
  • n.­3305
  • g.­26
  • g.­47
  • g.­48
  • g.­52
  • g.­79
  • g.­81
  • g.­91
  • g.­106
  • g.­127
  • g.­133
  • g.­141
  • g.­156
  • g.­160
  • g.­162
  • g.­190
  • g.­194
  • g.­209
  • g.­215
  • g.­226
  • g.­245
  • g.­269
  • g.­270
  • g.­271
  • g.­274
  • g.­283
  • g.­327
  • g.­369
  • g.­370
  • g.­371
  • g.­410
  • g.­468
  • g.­472
  • g.­476
  • g.­477
  • g.­500
  • g.­532
  • g.­534
  • g.­535
  • g.­550
  • g.­559
  • g.­560
  • g.­562
  • g.­567
  • g.­589
  • g.­590
  • g.­595
  • g.­617
  • g.­630
  • g.­632
  • g.­646
  • g.­657
  • g.­658
  • g.­672
  • g.­675
  • g.­725
  • g.­734
  • g.­764
  • g.­769
  • g.­778
  • g.­789
  • g.­800
  • g.­809
  • g.­864
  • g.­889
  • g.­890
  • g.­896
  • g.­905
  • g.­912
  • g.­914
  • g.­916
  • g.­921
  • g.­932
  • g.­937
  • g.­947
  • g.­959
  • g.­975
  • g.­1003
  • g.­1035
  • g.­1036
  • g.­1058
  • g.­1059
  • g.­1067
  • g.­1108
  • g.­1115
  • g.­1125
  • g.­1141
  • g.­1178
  • g.­1179
  • g.­1185
  • g.­1242
  • g.­1245
  • g.­1260
  • g.­1271
  • g.­1302
  • g.­1317
  • g.­1353
  • g.­1355
  • g.­1381
  • g.­1387
  • g.­1421
  • g.­1462
  • g.­1464
  • g.­1470
  • g.­1480
  • g.­1494
  • g.­1505
  • g.­1509
  • g.­1510
  • g.­1539
  • g.­1552
  • g.­1564
  • g.­1573
  • g.­1588
  • g.­1601
  • g.­1615
  • g.­1619
  • g.­1635
  • g.­1644
  • g.­1647
  • g.­1651
  • g.­1662
  • g.­1663
  • g.­1681
  • g.­1682
  • g.­1691
  • g.­1695
  • g.­1696
  • g.­1699
  • g.­1711
  • g.­1712
  • g.­1726
  • g.­1728
  • g.­1750
  • g.­1761
  • g.­1794
  • g.­1795
  • g.­1796
  • g.­1817
  • g.­1844
  • g.­1859
  • g.­1900
  • g.­1921
  • g.­1925
  • g.­1926
  • g.­1929
  • g.­1930
  • g.­1931
  • g.­1932
  • g.­1933
  • g.­1934
  • g.­1935
  • g.­1937
  • g.­1938
  • g.­1939
  • g.­1940
  • g.­1941
  • g.­1942
  • g.­1943
  • g.­1944
  • g.­1946
  • g.­1947
  • g.­1948
  • g.­1949
  • g.­1950
  • g.­1951
  • g.­1953
  • g.­1955
  • g.­1956
  • g.­1957
  • g.­1958
  • g.­1959
  • g.­1960
  • g.­1962
  • g.­1963
  • g.­1964
  • g.­1965
  • g.­1966
  • g.­1967
  • g.­1968
  • g.­1969
  • g.­1970
  • g.­1971
  • g.­1972
  • g.­1973
  • g.­1975
  • g.­1976
  • g.­1977
  • g.­1978
  • g.­1979
  • g.­1980
  • g.­1981
  • g.­1983
  • g.­1991
  • g.­2034
  • g.­2035
  • g.­2042
  • g.­2045
  • g.­2049
  • g.­2080
  • g.­2087
  • g.­2098
  • g.­2104
  • g.­2133
  • g.­2142
  • g.­2150
  • g.­2159
  • g.­2160
g.­2013

Vaśavartin

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • vaśavartin

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­1
  • 53.­902
g.­2028

Venus

Wylie:
  • pa bsangs
Tibetan:
  • པ་བསངས།
Sanskrit:
  • śukra

See “Śukra.”

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­160-161
  • 15.­173
  • 24.­64
  • 24.­104
  • 24.­110-111
  • 24.­186
  • n.­1413
  • n.­1426-1427
  • g.­1643
g.­2037

vidyā

Wylie:
  • rig pa
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyā

Magical spell; knowledge of spells; a class of male or female deities identified with their spells.

Located in 144 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­75
  • 1.­116-118
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­49-67
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­142
  • 2.­144
  • 2.­199-200
  • 7.­1-2
  • 7.­4
  • 8.­5-6
  • 9.­20
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­1
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1-4
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­139
  • 15.­2-3
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­26
  • 26.­7
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­25
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­45-47
  • 26.­55-56
  • 27.­3
  • 32.­2
  • 35.­215
  • 37.­25
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­66
  • 37.­70-72
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­99-100
  • 37.­102
  • 50.­15
  • 50.­19
  • 50.­25
  • 51.­24
  • 52.­19
  • 52.­40
  • 52.­52
  • 52.­64
  • 52.­71
  • 52.­107
  • 52.­130-131
  • 52.­135
  • 53.­450
  • 53.­453-454
  • 53.­502
  • 53.­508
  • 53.­517
  • 53.­521
  • 53.­563
  • 54.­38
  • 54.­99
  • n.­267
  • n.­379
  • n.­420
  • n.­626
  • n.­685
  • n.­721
  • n.­777
  • n.­935
  • n.­1045
  • n.­1049
  • n.­1261
  • n.­1268
  • n.­1281
  • n.­1505
  • n.­1585
  • n.­1691
  • n.­1805
  • n.­1877
  • n.­2345
  • n.­2420
  • n.­2512
  • n.­2730
  • n.­2753
  • n.­2927
  • n.­2978
  • n.­3032
  • n.­3188
  • n.­3289
  • n.­3381
  • g.­53
  • g.­595
  • g.­688
  • g.­726
  • g.­864
  • g.­906
  • g.­933
  • g.­938
  • g.­939
  • g.­1082
  • g.­1389
  • g.­1760
  • g.­1857
  • g.­1996
  • g.­2039
  • g.­2042
  • g.­2043
g.­2039

vidyādhara

Wylie:
  • rig ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རིག་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyādhara

One possessed of vidyā; this could refer to any being who is an adept of magical lore, but in particular to the class of semidivine, nonhuman beings of the same name. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “knowledge holder” or “adept of vidyās.”

Located in 69 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 9.­18-19
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­55
  • 10.­58
  • 13.­52
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­96
  • 14.­100
  • 14.­129
  • 14.­135
  • 26.­6-7
  • 26.­13-14
  • 26.­18-20
  • 26.­23-24
  • 26.­30-32
  • 26.­35-36
  • 26.­44
  • 26.­48
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­54
  • 26.­58
  • 28.­3
  • 28.­25
  • 28.­38
  • 28.­40-41
  • 29.­7
  • 29.­11
  • 29.­15
  • 31.­35
  • 37.­35
  • 37.­60
  • 52.­97
  • 53.­126
  • 53.­765-766
  • 53.­908
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­34
  • 54.­47
  • 54.­104
  • n.­247
  • n.­709
  • n.­1307
  • n.­1543-1544
  • n.­1561
  • n.­1804
  • n.­2351
  • n.­3190
  • n.­3299
  • g.­30
  • g.­352
  • g.­752
  • g.­1502
  • g.­2041
g.­2042

vidyārāja

Wylie:
  • rig pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyārāja

“Vidyā king,” a class of mantras and mantra deities; an epithet of Vajrapāṇi; an epithet of any powerful vidyā or mantra.

Located in 198 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­42
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­54
  • 2.­142
  • 2.­144
  • 9.­1-2
  • 9.­4
  • 9.­20
  • 11.­245
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­3
  • 14.­6-8
  • 14.­73
  • 14.­153-154
  • 15.­2
  • 25.­5
  • 26.­33
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­14
  • 30.­2
  • 35.­168
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­68
  • 50.­24
  • 53.­357
  • 53.­366
  • 53.­512
  • 54.­99
  • n.­68
  • n.­88
  • n.­98-99
  • n.­935
  • n.­1261
  • n.­1618
  • n.­2124
  • n.­2342
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2512
  • n.­2927
  • n.­3386
  • g.­19
  • g.­47
  • g.­48
  • g.­79
  • g.­89
  • g.­91
  • g.­102
  • g.­106
  • g.­127
  • g.­156
  • g.­162
  • g.­184
  • g.­194
  • g.­200
  • g.­209
  • g.­215
  • g.­226
  • g.­245
  • g.­269
  • g.­274
  • g.­283
  • g.­340
  • g.­366
  • g.­369
  • g.­370
  • g.­468
  • g.­474
  • g.­477
  • g.­500
  • g.­534
  • g.­535
  • g.­550
  • g.­574
  • g.­614
  • g.­617
  • g.­646
  • g.­657
  • g.­658
  • g.­667
  • g.­668
  • g.­720
  • g.­764
  • g.­769
  • g.­778
  • g.­800
  • g.­809
  • g.­842
  • g.­889
  • g.­890
  • g.­905
  • g.­912
  • g.­921
  • g.­932
  • g.­937
  • g.­947
  • g.­959
  • g.­978
  • g.­980
  • g.­1007
  • g.­1035
  • g.­1067
  • g.­1079
  • g.­1080
  • g.­1115
  • g.­1116
  • g.­1117
  • g.­1141
  • g.­1185
  • g.­1233
  • g.­1242
  • g.­1245
  • g.­1302
  • g.­1317
  • g.­1362
  • g.­1372
  • g.­1381
  • g.­1421
  • g.­1462
  • g.­1470
  • g.­1480
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1539
  • g.­1573
  • g.­1601
  • g.­1617
  • g.­1619
  • g.­1622
  • g.­1633
  • g.­1634
  • g.­1644
  • g.­1647
  • g.­1662
  • g.­1691
  • g.­1695
  • g.­1696
  • g.­1711
  • g.­1712
  • g.­1726
  • g.­1728
  • g.­1747
  • g.­1750
  • g.­1795
  • g.­1817
  • g.­1844
  • g.­1859
  • g.­1900
  • g.­1921
  • g.­1929
  • g.­1930
  • g.­1933
  • g.­1934
  • g.­1935
  • g.­1938
  • g.­1939
  • g.­1940
  • g.­1943
  • g.­1944
  • g.­1946
  • g.­1951
  • g.­1953
  • g.­1955
  • g.­1956
  • g.­1957
  • g.­1959
  • g.­1960
  • g.­1962
  • g.­1963
  • g.­1964
  • g.­1965
  • g.­1967
  • g.­1969
  • g.­1971
  • g.­1973
  • g.­1975
  • g.­1976
  • g.­1977
  • g.­1980
  • g.­1983
  • g.­2034
  • g.­2035
  • g.­2043
  • g.­2045
  • g.­2057
  • g.­2061
  • g.­2080
  • g.­2098
  • g.­2126
  • g.­2133
  • g.­2159
  • g.­2160
g.­2046

vighna

Wylie:
  • bar chad
Tibetan:
  • བར་ཆད།
Sanskrit:
  • vighna

A class of spirits that cause obstacles (the word vighna means “obstacle”).

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 31.­55
  • 35.­71
  • 35.­75
  • 35.­78
  • 35.­201
  • 37.­6
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­90
  • 52.­23
  • 53.­34
  • 53.­470-471
  • 53.­474-476
  • 54.­102
  • n.­1180
  • n.­2631
  • n.­2774
  • n.­2989
  • n.­2992
  • n.­2995
g.­2078

vināyaka

Wylie:
  • log ’dren
Tibetan:
  • ལོག་འདྲེན།
Sanskrit:
  • vināyaka

“Remover [of obstacles],” a class of semidivine beings; also a class of demons who create obstacles.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­102
  • 15.­104-105
  • 26.­40
  • 26.­44
  • 28.­6
  • 28.­37
  • 30.­16
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­42
  • 37.­120
  • 54.­102
  • n.­1577
  • n.­1816
  • g.­1984
g.­2088

Virgo

Wylie:
  • bu mo
Tibetan:
  • བུ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanyā

See “Kanyā.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­85
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­79
  • n.­1407
  • g.­686
g.­2113

Vṛṣabha

Wylie:
  • glang
Tibetan:
  • གླང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vṛṣabha

Taurus (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • n.­3790
  • g.­1778
g.­2115

Vṛścika

Wylie:
  • sdig pa
Tibetan:
  • སྡིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vṛścika

Scorpio (zodiac sign and constellation).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­98
  • g.­1498
g.­2125

wheel-turning monarch

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’ rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

See “cakravartin.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­115
  • 14.­130
  • 28.­38
  • 30.­51
  • n.­1093
  • n.­1836
  • g.­319
g.­2128

Yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 167 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­33
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­75-76
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­158-159
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­171
  • 2.­209
  • 10.­6
  • 11.­127
  • 11.­263
  • 12.­14
  • 13.­51
  • 14.­75
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­86
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­3
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­12
  • 24.­22
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­30
  • 26.­12-13
  • 26.­16
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­28-30
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­9
  • 30.­26
  • 30.­28
  • 30.­33
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­32
  • 31.­53
  • 32.­36
  • 32.­38
  • 33.­42
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­34
  • 37.­39
  • 37.­46
  • 37.­60
  • 37.­72
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­101
  • 37.­107
  • 38.­20
  • 38.­28
  • 50.­1
  • 50.­3
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­10
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­34
  • 50.­38
  • 51.­73-74
  • 52.­1
  • 52.­13
  • 52.­25
  • 52.­42
  • 52.­47
  • 52.­113
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­132
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­50-51
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­184
  • 53.­233
  • 53.­337-338
  • 53.­342
  • 53.­344
  • 53.­346
  • 53.­356
  • 53.­364
  • 53.­407
  • 53.­457
  • 53.­459
  • 53.­531
  • 53.­773
  • 53.­822-823
  • 53.­825
  • 53.­901
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­48
  • 54.­104
  • n.­441
  • n.­496
  • n.­725
  • n.­1303
  • n.­1515
  • n.­1561
  • n.­1824
  • n.­1862
  • n.­1871
  • n.­1873
  • n.­1895
  • n.­1947
  • n.­2086
  • n.­2322-2323
  • n.­2328
  • n.­2351
  • n.­2467
  • n.­2596
  • n.­2598
  • n.­2658
  • n.­2726
  • n.­2749
  • n.­2913
  • n.­2916
  • n.­2934
  • n.­2980-2981
  • n.­3027
  • n.­3295
  • n.­3312
  • g.­159
  • g.­321
  • g.­337
  • g.­497
  • g.­555
  • g.­563
  • g.­564
  • g.­578
  • g.­580
  • g.­582
  • g.­583
  • g.­593
  • g.­616
  • g.­702
  • g.­786
  • g.­807
  • g.­819
  • g.­865
  • g.­899
  • g.­969
  • g.­991
  • g.­1161
  • g.­1198
  • g.­1259
  • g.­1276
  • g.­1359
  • g.­1488
  • g.­1567
  • g.­1885
  • g.­2030
  • g.­2074
  • g.­2075
  • g.­2132
g.­2132

yakṣiṇī

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin mo
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣiṇī

Female yakṣa.

Located in 126 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­33
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­75
  • 1.­99
  • 1.­101
  • 2.­52
  • 2.­159
  • 25.­30-31
  • 26.­27
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­9
  • 37.­34
  • 37.­60
  • 51.­73-74
  • 52.­39
  • 52.­41
  • 52.­46
  • 52.­49-51
  • 52.­55-58
  • 52.­64
  • 52.­75-76
  • 52.­79-80
  • 52.­88-89
  • 52.­91-94
  • 52.­106-107
  • 52.­109
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­117
  • 53.­356
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­398-399
  • 53.­564
  • 53.­826
  • n.­432
  • n.­2351
  • n.­2597
  • n.­2602
  • n.­2657
  • n.­2675-2676
  • n.­2681
  • n.­2705
  • n.­2739
  • n.­2755
  • n.­3943
  • g.­8
  • g.­10
  • g.­71
  • g.­73
  • g.­123
  • g.­124
  • g.­133
  • g.­173
  • g.­176
  • g.­191
  • g.­256
  • g.­353
  • g.­536
  • g.­561
  • g.­565
  • g.­568
  • g.­584
  • g.­595
  • g.­630
  • g.­677
  • g.­721
  • g.­724
  • g.­811
  • g.­814
  • g.­815
  • g.­871
  • g.­1001
  • g.­1005
  • g.­1009
  • g.­1036
  • g.­1037
  • g.­1093
  • g.­1095
  • g.­1106
  • g.­1107
  • g.­1149
  • g.­1199
  • g.­1225
  • g.­1272
  • g.­1338
  • g.­1339
  • g.­1353
  • g.­1497
  • g.­1576
  • g.­1620
  • g.­1623
  • g.­1635
  • g.­1650
  • g.­1661
  • g.­1663
  • g.­1698
  • g.­1702
  • g.­1707
  • g.­1720
  • g.­1729
  • g.­1751
  • g.­1755
  • g.­1867
  • g.­1906
  • g.­2020
  • g.­2021
  • g.­2049
  • g.­2084
  • g.­2086
  • g.­2131
g.­2133

Yama

Wylie:
  • gshin rje
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • yama

The god of death who rules over the realm of the pretas; a vidyārāja from the personal retinue of Vajrapāṇi; one of the kings of rākṣasas.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 1.­72
  • 1.­75
  • 1.­77
  • 2.­162
  • 2.­169
  • 6.­11
  • 11.­237
  • 30.­22
  • 37.­74
  • 51.­16
  • 52.­138
  • 52.­147
  • 53.­426-427
  • 53.­672
  • 53.­907
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­71
  • 54.­101
  • n.­1817-1818
  • n.­2353
  • n.­2540
  • n.­3294
  • n.­3387
  • g.­1921
  • g.­2137
g.­2134

Yāma

Wylie:
  • ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 15.­192
  • 37.­62
  • 53.­210
  • 53.­678
  • n.­886
  • n.­5166
g.­2136

Yamāntaka

Wylie:
  • gshin rje’i gshed
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེའི་གཤེད།
Sanskrit:
  • yamāntaka

Wrathful aspect of Mañjuśrī; also the namesake mantra.

Located in 58 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­72
  • 1.­74
  • 1.­109-110
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­122
  • 2.­138-139
  • 2.­148-149
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­88
  • 5.­9
  • 6.­4
  • 35.­81
  • 35.­161
  • 50.­2-3
  • 50.­17
  • 50.­32
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­11
  • 51.­51
  • 51.­56
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­8
  • 52.­115-116
  • 52.­129
  • 52.­138
  • 52.­147-149
  • 53.­419
  • 53.­885
  • n.­88
  • n.­377
  • n.­2503-2504
  • n.­2509
  • n.­2520
  • n.­2525
  • n.­2528
  • n.­2619
  • n.­2744
  • n.­2752
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2758
  • n.­2959
  • n.­3284
  • n.­6046
  • g.­556
  • g.­765
  • g.­875
  • g.­905
  • g.­1136
g.­2157

yoke

Wylie:
  • gnya’ shing
Tibetan:
  • གཉའ་ཤིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • yuga

A measure of length equal to four cubits; also, a measure of angular distance (translated here as an “angular yoke”).

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­66
  • 15.­159-160
  • 15.­165
  • n.­785
  • n.­810
  • n.­1235
  • n.­1239
  • g.­132
0
    You are downloading:

    The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud, Toh 543). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh543/UT22084-088-038-chapter-15.Copy
    84000. The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud, Toh 543). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh543/UT22084-088-038-chapter-15.Copy
    84000. (2025) The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud, Toh 543). (Dharmachakra Translation Committee, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh543/UT22084-088-038-chapter-15.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from Action tantras
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy